Canon C300 User Manual

PUB. DIE-0406-001  
HD Camcorder  
The warranty information for Australia and New Zealand is at the end of this Instruction Manual.  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an  
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to  
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”  
within the products enclosure, that may be of  
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
CAUTION:  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR  
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE  
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO  
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
The exclamation point, within an equilateral triangle, is  
intended to alert the user to the presence of important  
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in  
the literature accompanying the product.  
3
European Union (and EEA) only.  
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household  
waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC)  
and/or your national laws implementing those Directives.  
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized  
one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste  
electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of  
waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous  
substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product  
will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.  
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste  
authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/  
environment.  
(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)  
Important Safety Instructions  
In these safety instructions the word “apparatus”  
refers to the Canon HD Camcorder EOS C300 / EOS  
C300 PL and all its accessories.  
A grounding type plug has two blades and a third  
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third  
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided  
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an  
electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
4
1. Read these instructions.  
2. Keep these instructions.  
3. Heed all warnings.  
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from  
the apparatus.  
4. Follow all instructions.  
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6. Clean only with dry cloth.  
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by  
the manufacturer.  
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.  
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
when unused for long periods of time.  
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other  
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce  
heat.  
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has  
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply  
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled  
or objes have fallen into the apparatus, the  
apras has been exposed to rain or moisture,  
oes noperate normally, or has been dropped.  
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized  
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two  
blades with one wider than the other.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with ICE003.  
Trademark Acknowledgements  
• SD and SDHC Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.  
• CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.  
• The Logo is a trademark of CompactFlash Association.  
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
• Apple, Macintosh, Mac OS, Final Cut Pro are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
• Avid, Media Composer and NewsCutter are trademarks or registered trademarks of Avid Technology, Inc. or  
its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.  
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.  
• Other names and products not mentioned above may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their  
respective companies.  
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.  
• ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT  
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED  
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2  
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,  
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206.  
Highlights of the EOS C300/C300 PL  
The Canon HD Camcorder EOS C300/C300 PL has been designed to meet the demanding needs and highest  
expectations of industry professionals. The following are just some of the many features that will help turn your  
creative vision into reality.  
5
Improved displays  
HD Recording  
The articulated monitor unit can be rotated 270º,  
allowing for easy monitoring and operation from the  
side of the camcorder. When using the viewfinder, its  
improved ergonomic design will ensure a tight and  
comfortable fit. Both the 10.1 cm (4 in.) LCD screen  
and the viewfinder have 100% coverage so you can  
always perfectly frame your shots. Additionally, the  
rear panel will provide a quick and convenient  
overview of the main shooting functions currently in  
use.  
Large Super 35mm CMOS sensor and DIGIC DV  
III image processor  
The camcorder is equipped with a large Super  
35mm CMOS sensor that captures video at an  
effective pixel count of 8.29 megapixels  
(3840x2160). Combined with the DIGIC DV III image  
processor, the camcorder offers a center resolution  
of 1,000 TV lines*. Furthermore, thanks to its fast  
scanning speed, the camcorder produces  
spectacular video with true-to-life color reproduction  
while reducing noise and “rolling shutter” artifacts.  
* Varies depending on the lens used.  
Recording media  
The camcorder records video and audio to  
Compaclash (CF) cards. You can even make  
lengtrordings without worry because the  
mcordfeatures two CF card slots. When one  
ard bemes full, the recording will  
tomatically continue on the other one without  
ierruption when you use relay recording (A 44). In  
addition, using double slot recording (A 44) lets  
you record the same clip simultaneously to both CF  
cards.  
Interchangeable Lenses  
Enjoy the freedom and creative versatility of using  
interchangeable lenses to achieve exactly the look  
you want. The EOS C300 features an EF lens mount  
allowing you to use a huge variety of high-qualit
Canon EF lenses, including the new high-end C
Lens series, as well as other lenses. Te EOS C
PL features a PL lens mount, allowing ou to use a  
vast array of Super 35mm cinematogrhy lenes  
commonly used in motion picture producon.  
Supplied Canon XF Utility software  
Managing your recordings is as simple as using the  
supplied Canon XF Utility software. You can  
transfer your recordings to your computer, where  
you can view and manage them. Using the supplied  
plugins, you can then use the recordings with major  
NLE software*.  
Superb HD video  
The camcorder uses the MPEG-2 Long GOP codec.  
Your recordings are saved as Material eXchange  
Format (MXF) files, which are compatible with major  
non-linear editing (NLE) software.  
Moreover, the camcorder offers you a whole array of  
options when it comes to the video configuration of  
your recordings. By controlling the type of recording  
(NTSC-compatible, PAL-compatible or true 24.00P),  
bit rate, resolution and frame rate of your recordings  
you can select a video configuration to suit your  
needs from a total of 27 different combinations.  
* Refer to Saving Clips to a Computer (A 132) for details  
on compatible software.  
Versatile Artistic Expression  
Special recording modes  
The special recording modes (A 93) give you more  
creative control over your recordings. You can create  
a slow motion or fast motion effect in your  
recordings, record a certain number of frames at a  
set interval (ideal for nature shots and other subjects  
with little movement) or record a certain number of  
frames every time you press a button (ideal for stop  
motion animation).  
Operability and Adaptability  
Freely customizable compact design  
At its most compact configuration, the camcorder  
offers convenient and hassle-free hand-held  
operation. Modular components, including the  
supplied handle unit, monitor unit and grip unit will  
let you expand and adapt the configuration to match  
your shooting conditions (A 32).  
 
Custom picture settings  
Other Functions  
With custom picture settings (A 101), you can enjoy  
unparalleled image control to deliver the “look” you  
want by adjusting parameters, such as gamma and  
sharpness. The custom picture settings can be  
recorded onto an SD card, which allows multiple  
C300 / C300 PL camcorders to use the same  
settings, or embedded in the recording itself.  
Remote operation via Wi-Fi  
You can attach the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File  
Transmitter to the camcorder and operate it remotely  
via Wi-Fi using the Wi-Fi Remote application (A 47).  
The Wi-Fi Remote application lets you monitor the  
image through live view and remotely control the  
focus, shutter speed, ISO speed/gain and other  
settings.  
6
Canon Log gamma for spectacular dynamic range  
Using the Canon Log gamma (A 109) you can get  
recordings with amazing dynamic range, allowing you  
to realize in post-production the artistic vision you  
desire.  
Audio  
Sound is recorded as 2-channel linear PCM audio  
(16-bit/48 kHz). You can use the built-in microphone  
or the two XLR audio input terminals (with phantom  
power supply) when recording.  
Video scopes  
Advanced Professional Features  
Check the brightness of the image using the  
waveform monitor (A 88), the color of the image  
using the vectorscope (A 89), or the focus using the  
edge monitor (A 89).  
Pro-level connectivity  
An industry-standard HD/SD SDI terminal (A 129)  
for uncompressed HD signal output, embedded  
audio and SMPTE time code (LTC) give the  
camcorder the functionality of professional broadcast  
cameras. Genlock synchronization (A 77), the TIME  
CODE terminal (A 78, 79) and SYNC OUT terminal  
allow the camcorder to be part of any multi-camera  
shooting setup.  
Added and improved functionality  
Other functions include the option to add metadata  
to recordings (A 85), and the Intelligent System-  
compatiblbattery pack (A 173).  
Customization  
The camcorder features several customization  
options. You can assign often-used functions to  
assignable buttons (A 99) so that you can call u
those functions with the press of a single utton. Y
can also register frequently-used menu sttings in an  
easy-to-access personal menu (My MenuA 30
Custom functions (A 110) and custom onsre
displays (A 110) give you even more freedom to  
control many aspects of the camcorders operation.  
Save custom picture and menu settings to an SD  
card so that you can transfer your setting preferences  
to other C300 / C300 PL camcorders in order to use  
them in the same way.  
Table of Contents  
7
Remote Operation Via the Wi-Fi Remote  
Video Cfiguration: Type of Recording, Bit Rate,  
anginMain Camera Functions with the FUNC.  
8
Reference Video Signal Input (Genlock  
Synchronization) 77  
bedding Custom Picture Settings in a  
Recording 104  
Connecting an External Microphone or External  
Audio Input Source to the Camcorder 80  
Selecting the Audio Input from the XLR  
Terminals 81  
Adjusting the Audio Level from the XLR  
Terminals 82  
Adjusting the Audio Level from the MC  
Terminal 83  
Customizing Functions and Onscreen  
Setting a User Memo Created with Canon XF  
Utility 85  
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark to the Last Clip  
Recorded 91  
9
Deleting the User Memo and GPS  
Information 122  
Copying a Custom Picture File Embedded in a  
Clip 122  
Displaying a Frame Index Screen of a Single  
Clip 124  
Superimposing Onscreen Displays to Appear on  
an External Monitor 130  
Installing and Uninstalling Canon XF Utility  
(Windows) 133  
Installing and Uninstalling Canon XF Utility  
(Mac OS) 135  
10  
Introduction  
1
11  
About this Manual  
Thank you for purchasing the Canon EOS C300/C300 PL. Please read this manual carefully before you use the  
camcorder and retain it for future reference. Should the camcorder fail to operate correctly, refer to  
Troubleshooting (A 162).  
Conventions Used in this Manual  
IMPORTANT: Precautions related to the camcorders operation.  
NOTES: Additional topics that complement the basic operating procedures.  
A: Reference page number.  
#: Text that applies only to the model shown in the icon.  
• The following terms are used in this manual.  
“Screen” refers to the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen.  
“CF card” refers to a CompactFlash (CF) card.  
“SD card” refers to an SD or SDHC memory card.  
“Recording media” refers to CF cards and SD cds.  
• Photographs in the manual are simulated picn wh a still camera. Some screenshots have been  
altered to make them easier to read.  
• Illustrations in the manual show the anon EOS camcorder with a Canon EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens  
attached.  
     
About this Manual  
The arrow is used to abbreviate menu  
selections. For a detailed explanation on how to  
use the menus, refer to Using the Menus  
(A 29). For a concise summary of all available  
menu options and settings, refer to the appendix  
Menu Options (A 147).  
Operating modes  
indicates that a function is available in the  
operating mode indicated and indicates  
that the function is not available. For a detailed  
explanation, refer to Turning the Camcorder On  
and Off (A 26).  
12  
When a procedure requires selecting an option,  
the available options are listed within or after the  
procedure. Brackets [ ] are used to refer to menu  
options as they are displayed on screen.  
When a function requires the use of the menu,  
the quick reference shows the submenus and,  
when applicable, the default setting for the menu  
item. The example illustration indicates that you  
can find the function by selecting the [¤ TC/  
UB Setup] menu and then the [Time Code]  
menu item.  
Supplied Accessories  
Supplied Accessories  
The following accessories are supplied with the camcorder.  
13  
Monitor Unit  
Handle Unit  
Grip Unit1  
Body Cap1  
Battery Charger CG-940  
(incl. power cord)  
BP-955 Battery Pack  
(incl. terminal cover)  
Eye Cup  
Viewfinder Cap  
CA-940 Compact Power Adapter  
(incl. power cord)  
DC40 DC Cable  
(l. cable tie)  
SS-1200 Shoulder Strap  
Thumb Rest  
Adapter Base for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.)  
Tripods  
WFT Attachment Bracket2  
Tape Measure Hooks1 (x 2)  
Canon XF Utilities Disc3  
1
2
3
Comes pre-attached to the camcorder.  
Used to secure the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter, when it is attached to the camcorder.  
The Canon XF Utilities Disc includes software for saving and managing clips on a computer. For details on installing the software,  
refer to Saving Clips to a Computer (A 132). For more information on the functions, refer to the ‘Canon XF Utility Instruction  
Manual’ (PDF file) after you install the software.  
 
Names of Parts  
Names of Parts  
14  
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
10  
11  
4
5
12  
13  
5 16  
1
2
MAGN. (magnification) button (A 7/  
Assignable button 1 (A 99)  
PEAKING button (A 70) /  
Assignable button 2 (A 99)  
ND FILTER +/- buttons (A 63)  
ZEBRA button (A 72)/  
10 Control dial (A 62, 64)  
11 STATUS button (A 156)  
12 Å (white balance adjustment) button (A 66)/  
INDEX button (A 114)/Ñ (stop) button (A 114)  
13 u (review recording) button (A 92)/Ò (play/  
pause) button (A 114)  
3
4
Assignable button 3 (A 99)  
WFM (waveform monitor) button (A 88)/  
Assignable button 4 (A 99)  
Q switch (A 26)  
14 HEADPHONE + button (A 117)/Assignable  
button 5 (A 99)  
15 HEADPHONE - button (A 117)/Assignable  
button 6 (A 99)  
16 CUSTOM PICTURE button (A 101)  
5
6
7
8
Tally lamp (A 49)  
DISP. (display) button (A 52,115)/BATT. INFO  
(battery information) button (A 24)  
SELECT dial/SET button (A 29)  
9
 
Names of Parts  
17  
18  
15  
29  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
30  
31  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
17 WFT terminal (A 47)  
18 EXT (external signal) terminals 1 and 2 (A
19 REMOTE terminal  
2HD/SD SDI terminal (A 129)  
25 D card access indicator (A 42)  
26 × (headphone) terminal (A 84)  
27 DC IN terminal (A 25)  
For connecting commercially availble remote  
controllers.  
28 SD card slot (A 42)  
20 SYNC OUT (synchronizing signal outp) rminal  
29 MIC (microphone) terminal (A 80)  
30 Grip Unit connection terminal (A 38)  
21 HDMI OUT terminal (A 129)  
22 GENLOCK terminal (A 77)  
23 TIME CODE terminal (A 78, 79)  
31 Grip Unit attachment thread (A 38)  
Names of Parts  
#
$
16  
39  
40  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
41  
42  
32  
32 START/STOP button (A 49)  
39 $ PL Lens mount (A 34)  
40 $ Bayonet ring handles (A 34)  
1 $ PL Lens index pin (A 34)  
42 $ Bayonet ring (A 34)  
33 # EF Lens mount index (A 32)  
34 # EF-S Lens mount index (A 2)  
35 # Lens release button (A 32)  
36 # EF Lens lock pin (A 32)  
37 # EF Lens mount (A 32)  
38 # EF Lens contacts (A 32)  
Names of Parts  
54  
17  
43  
55  
56  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
57  
58  
59  
51  
52  
53  
61  
63 64  
60  
43 Viewfinder unit  
44 Viewfinder unit LOCK/RELEASE screw (A 171)  
45 (rear panels backlight) button (A 53)  
57 CF card slot cover switches for CF card slots A  
(top) and B (bottom) (A 41)  
58 RESET button (A 163)  
46 FUNC. (main functions) button (A 57)  
47 START/STOP button (A 49)  
48 Joystick (A 29)/SET button (A 29)  
49 CANCEL button (A 29)  
59 SLOT SELECT (CF card slot selection) button  
60 CF card slot covers for CF card slots A (top) and B  
(bottom)  
50 MENU button (A 29)  
61 CF card release buttons for CF card slots A (top)  
and B (bottom) (A 42)  
62 BATT. OPEN (open battery compartment) switch  
51 CF card slots A (top) and B (bottom) (A 41)  
52 RELEASE (battery release) latch (A 24)  
53 Battery compartment  
(A 24)  
54 Viewfinder (A 35, 37)  
55 Dioptric adjustment dial (A 36)  
56 Rear panel (A 53)  
63 Battery compartment cover (A 24)  
64 CF2 (CF card slot A) and CF3 (CF card slot B)  
access indicators (A 41)  
Names of Parts  
66  
67  
18  
68  
65  
69  
65 Tape measure hooks  
69 Accessory shoe with mounting hole for  
0.64 cm 1/4 in.) screws  
Use the hooks to accurately measure the distance  
from the focal plane.  
For attaing accessories such as the optional  
VL-10Battery Video Light.  
66  
Focal plane marks  
67 Socket for the WFT Attachment Bracket (A 47)  
68 Strap mounts (A 39)  
72  
73  
70  
71  
70 TB-1 Tripod Base for tripods with 0.95 cm (3/8 in.)  
screws (A 37)  
72 Attachment sockets for the optional TA-100 Tripod  
Adapter (A 37)  
71 Tripod socket (A 37)  
73 Tripod base screws (A 37)  
Names of Parts  
Grip Unit  
19  
1
2
5
3
4
6
7
1
MAGN. (magnification) button (A 70)/  
Assignable button 7 (A 99)  
Control dial (A 62, 64)  
START/STOP button (A 49)  
Grip belt (A 39)  
Joystick (A 29)/SET button (A 29)  
Connection plug (A 38)  
Lock screw (A 38)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
 
Names of Parts  
Monitor Unit  
20  
1
2
Operation panel  
(A 21)  
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
LCD panel  
MIRROR button (A 36)  
Microphone lock screw (A 80)  
Microphone holder (A 80)  
Microphone cable clamp (A 80)  
XLR terminals CH1 (right) and CH2 (left) (A 80)  
 
Names of Parts  
Operation panel  
21  
13 14 15 16 17  
18  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
19  
20  
21 24  
7
8
DISP. (display) button (A 52, 115)  
Ñ (stop) button (A 114)/  
16 Ù (skip forward) button (A 116)/  
Assignable button 15 (A 99)  
Assignable button 14 (A 99)  
WFM (waveform monitor) button (A 88)/  
Assignable button 8 (A 99)  
17 XLR terminal switches for CH1 (top) and CH2  
9
(bottom) (A 81)  
18 Protective cover for XLR audio controls (A 82)  
19 ã switches for CH1 (top) and CH2  
(bottom) (A 82)  
10 Ú (skip backward) button (A 116)/  
Assignable button 13 (A 99)  
11 EDGE MON. (edge monitor) button (A 88)/  
20 ã dials for CH1 (top) and CH2 (bottom)  
Assignable button 9 (A 99)  
(A 82)  
12 INDEX button (A 114)  
13 Ø (fast reverse playback) button (A 116)/  
21 START/STOP button (A 49)  
22 MENU button (A 29)  
Assignable button 10 (A 99)  
14 Ò (play/pause) button (A 114)/  
Assignable button 11 (A 99)  
23 Joystick (A 29)/SET button (A 29)  
24 CANCEL button (A 29)  
15 × (fast playback) button (A 116)/  
Assignable button 12 (A 99)  
 
Names of Parts  
Handle Unit  
22  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Mounting hole for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.) screws  
Front accessory shoe  
Top accessory shoe  
Lock screw (A 39)  
 
Preparations  
2
23  
Preparing the Power Supply  
You can power the camcorder using a battery pack or directly using the compact power adapter. If you connect  
the compact power adapter to the camcorder while a battery pack is attached, the camcorder will draw power  
from the power outlet.  
Charge battery packs before use. For approximate charging times and recording/playback times with a fully  
charged battery pack, refer to Charging Times (A 174) and Recording and Playback Times (A 174).  
Using a Battery Pack  
You can power the camcorder using the supplied BP-955 or an optional BP-950G, BP-970G or BP-975 Battery  
Pack*. All four are compatible with Intelligent System, meaning that you can check the remaining battery time.  
* The optional BP-970G / BP-975 Battery Pack was not originally designed for use with this camcorder. Because of its size, you  
will not be able to close the battery compartment cover when using one (A 169).  
Charging the Battery Pack  
Charge battery packs using the supplied CG-940 Batteer. Befe  
charging, remove the terminal cover of the battery ack.  
1 Connect the power cord to the battery charg
2 Plug the power cord into a power olet.  
3 Attach the battery pack to the battey charger.  
• Press lightly and slide the battery pacin the rection of the arrow until it clicks.  
• The CHARGE indicator starts flashing and also indicates the battery  
packs approximate charge. The indicator will stay on when charging has  
completed.  
CHARGE indicator  
0-34%: Flashes once per second  
35-69%: Flashes twice per second  
70-99%: Flashes 3 times per second  
4 When charging has completed, remove the battery pack from the battery charger.  
5 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect it from the battery charger.  
IMPORTANT  
• Do not connect to the battery charger any product that is not expressly recommended for use with this camcorder.  
NOTES  
• We recommend charging the battery pack in temperatures between 10 ºC and 30 ºC (50 ºF and 86 ºF).  
Outside the temperature range of 0 ºC to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 104 ºF), charging will not start.  
• If there is a malfunction with the battery charger or battery pack, the charge indicator will go out and charging  
will stop.  
• For handling precautions regarding the battery pack, refer to Battery Pack (A 168).  
• Charged battery packs continue to discharge naturally. Therefore, charge them on the day of use, or the day  
before, to ensure a full charge.  
• We recommend that you prepare battery packs to last 2 to 3 times longer than you think you might need.  
         
Preparing the Power Supply  
Attaching the Battery Pack  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Slide the BATT. OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow and open  
the battery compartment cover.  
24  
3 Insert the battery pack all the way into the compartment as shown  
in the illustration and press it gently toward the left until it clicks.  
4 Close the battery compartment cover.  
Removing the Battery Pack  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Slide the BATT. OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow and op
the battery compartment cover.  
3 Holding down the RELEASE latch, slide the battery pack the  
right and then pull it out.  
4 Close the battery compartment cover.  
Checking the Remaining Battery Charge  
When the camcorder is turned on, you can check the remaining battery charge by looking at any recording/  
playback screen or the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 160). When the camcorder is turned off, use one  
of the following methods to check the approximate remaining battery charge.  
Press the CHECK button on the battery pack. An indicator will light for  
approximately 3 seconds and show the approximate remaining battery  
charge.  
0-25%  
CHECK button  
26-50%  
51-75%  
76-100%  
0
100%  
Battery charge indicator  
     
Preparing the Power Supply  
Press the BATT. INFO button to display the remaining battery time and  
available recording time (displays for 5 seconds). Depending on the battery  
life, the battery information may not be displayed.  
25  
NOTES  
• The first time you use a battery pack, fully charge it and then use the  
camcorder until the battery pack is completely exhausted. Doing so will ensure that the remaining recording  
time will be displayed accurately.  
• Repeatedly charging and discharging the battery pack will eventually shorten its battery life. You can check the  
battery life on the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 160) or the battery information screen (press the  
BATT. INFO button while the camcorder is turned off). Fully charging the battery pack and then discharging it  
will give you a more accurate reading.  
USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable.  
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery.  
Using a Household Power Outlet  
You can also power the camcorder directly  
from a power outlet using the supplied CA-940  
Compact Power Adapter and DC-940 DC  
Cable.  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Connect the DC cable to the DC IN terminal  
on the camcorder.  
3 Connect the power cord to the comact  
power adapter and plug it into a poer  
outlet.  
4 Connect the DC cable to the compact power  
adapter.  
You can use the supplied cable tie to  
secure the cable and prevent the plug from  
being accidentally disconnected.  
DC IN  
terminal  
IMPORTANT  
• Turn off the camcorder before connecting or disconnecting the compact power adapter.  
NOTES  
• When using the camcorder with a household power outlet, you can change the battery pack while the power  
is on.  
   
Preparing the Power Supply  
Turning the Camcorder On and Off  
The camcorder has two operating modes: CAMERA (  
) mode for making recordings and MEDIA (  
)
mode for playing back recordings. Select the operating mode using the Q switch.  
26  
To turn on the camcorder  
Set the Q switch to CAMERA for  
mode or MEDIA for  
mode.  
CAMERA mode  
MEDIA mode  
To turn off the camcorder  
Set the Q switch to OFF.  
   
Date, Time and Language Settings  
Date, Time and Language Settings  
Setting the Date and Time  
You will need to set the date and time of the camcorder before you can start using it. When the camcorders  
clock is not set, the [Date/Time] screen will appear automatically with the first field selected (month or day,  
depending on the country/region of purchase).  
27  
Operating modes:  
1 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to change the month/day then move (Ð) to the  
next field.  
To move to the next field you can also press SET (press the joysk itself or press the SET button).  
2 Change the rest of the fields in the same way.  
3 Select (Ð) [Set] and then press SET to start the cd closthe screen.  
NOTES  
You can change the date format anthe clock 12/24 hours) with the [w Other Functions] > [Clock  
Set] > [Date Format] setting.  
• You can also change the date and timlater n (not during the initial setup) with the [w Other Functions] >  
[Clock Set] > [Date/Time] setting.  
• When the built-in rechargeable lithium battery is exhausted, the date and time setting may be lost. In such  
case, recharge the built-in lithium battery (A 170) and set the time zone, date and time again.  
Changing the Time Zone  
[w Other Functions]  
Change the time zone to match the time zone of your location. The default  
setting is [UTC-05:00 New York] or [UTC+01:00 Central Europe],  
depending on the country/region of purchase. The time zones are based  
[Time Zone]  
on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).  
[UTC-05:00 New York]  
or  
Operating modes:  
[UTC+01:00 Central Europe]*  
1 Press the MENU button.  
* Depending on the country/region  
of purchase.  
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select  
[w Other Functions].  
3 Select [Time Zone] in a similar fashion.  
4 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to change the time zone.  
5 Press SET to set the time zone and then press the MENU button to close the menu.  
         
Date, Time and Language Settings  
Displaying the Date and Time while Recording  
[£ LCD/VF Setup]  
[Custom Display 2]  
[Date/Time]  
You can display the date and time on the screen.  
Operating modes:  
28  
1 Press the MENU button.  
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select  
[£ LCD/VF Setup].  
[Off]  
3 Select [Custom Display 2] and then [Date/Time] in a similar fashion.  
4 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the information to display.  
• Select [Off] to record without displaying the date and time.  
5 Press SET and then press the MENU button to close the menu.  
• The selected date/time display will appear at the bottom of the screen.  
Changing the Language  
[w Other Functions]  
The default language of the camcorder is English. You can change it to  
German, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish, Russian, Simplified Chinese
Japanese. Please note that some settings and screens will be displan  
English, regardless of the language setting.  
[Language !]  
[English]  
Operating modes:  
1 Press the MENU button.  
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn he SELECT dial to select [w Other Functions].  
3 Select [Language !] in a similar fasio.  
4 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select a language.  
5 Press SET to change the language and then press the MENU button to close the menu.  
       
Using the Menus  
Using the Menus  
In  
opens after pressing the MENU button. You can also register frequently used menu settings in a customized  
submenu (My Menu) for easy access. In mode, press the MENU button to open the menu for general  
mode, many of the camcorders functions can be adjusted from the menu for general settings, which  
29  
settings or SET to open the clip menu for clip operations. For details about the available menu options and  
settings, refer to Menu Options (A 147).  
Operating modes:  
SET button  
SELECT dial  
CANCEL button  
MENU button  
Joystick  
CANCEL button  
MENU button  
ENU button  
ss to open the menu and then press again to  
se the menu after adjusting desired settings.  
Joystick  
CAEL button  
Presto return to the previous menu or to stop  
some operations that are in progress.  
SET button  
Note that while only the joystick on the monitor  
unit is labeled as “SET”, all three joysticks will  
function as the SET button when pressed down.  
Joystick  
Push the joystick to move the orange selecn  
frame in the menu. Then, press the joystick ilf  
or the SET button at the center of the SELECT  
dial to select the menu item indicated by the  
orange selection frame.  
SELECT dial  
Turn the dial to move the orange selection frame  
up or down in the menu.  
Selecting an Option from the Menu  
The following is a step-by-step explanation of how to select an option from the menu. In the procedures  
throughout the rest of this manual, opening and closing the menu is assumed and not included in the procedure.  
1 Press the MENU button.  
• The menu opens with the orange selection frame indicating the menu item that was selected the previous  
time the menu was closed (unless the camcorder was turned off).  
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired submenu.  
3 Push the joystick right or press SET.  
• The orange selection frame will appear on a menu item in the submenu.  
• Press the CANCEL button, push the joystick left, or select [L] to return to the previous submenu.  
4 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired menu item.  
• If a submenu contains many menu items, a scroll bar will appear on the right side of the submenu indicating  
that you must scroll up or down to see other menu items.  
• A Ð mark next to a menu item indicates another submenu. Repeat steps 3 and 4.  
5 Push the joystick right or press SET.  
     
Using the Menus  
• The orange selection frame will appear on a setting option.  
• Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous submenu.  
6 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired setting option and then  
press SET.  
• Depending on the menu item, additional selections may be necessary.  
30  
7 Press the MENU button to close the menu.  
NOTES  
• Unavailable items may appear grayed out.  
• Pressing the MENU button at any time closes the menu.  
• You can check the current settings on the status screens (A 156).  
Using the Customized Submenu (My Menu)  
You can register up to 14 frequently used menu settings under the My Menu submenu for easy access.  
Furthermore, if you set an assignable button to [My Menu] (A 99), you can press the button to access your  
registered menu settings even faster and more easily.  
Adding Menu Settings  
[
My Menu]  
[Edit]  
1 Open the My Menu [Add] screen.  
My Menu] > [Edit] > [Register]  
[
• The menu will change to blue to indicate yoting menu  
settings to add to the My Menu sumenu.  
[Register]  
2 Navigate the menus to find the menu etting you want to add and then  
press SET.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.  
• The menu setting you registered will now appear under the My Menu submenu.  
Rearranging Menu Settings  
[
My Menu]  
[Edit]  
1 Open the My Menu [Move] screen.  
[
My Menu] > [Edit] > [Move]  
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the setting  
you want to move and then press SET.  
[Move]  
• An orange icon will appear next to the setting you selected to  
move.  
3 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to move the setting to the desired position and then press  
SET.  
Removing Menu Settings  
[
My Menu]  
[Edit]  
1 Open the My Menu [Delete] screen.  
My Menu] > [Edit] > [Delete]  
[
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the setting  
you want to remove and then press SET.  
[Delete]  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.  
   
Using the Menus  
Resetting the My Menu Submenu  
[
My Menu]  
1 Reset all the menu settings registered to the My Menu submenu.  
[
My Menu] > [Edit] > [Reset All]  
[Edit]  
31  
2 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.  
[Reset All]  
Preparing the Camcorder  
Preparing the Camcorder  
This section outlines the basic preparations for the camcorder such as attaching a lens and attaching the  
modular units to the camcorder: monitor unit, grip unit, handle unit, thumb rest, eye cup, etc. Your camcorder is  
nothing if not versatile and you can choose the configuration that best fits your needs and shooting conditions.  
32  
Configuration with monitor  
Configuration with monitor  
and handle for easy carrying  
Light configuration with grip Minimal configuration with  
for hand-held shooting  
thumb rest  
NOTES  
• When changing the camcorders configuration, be caref
to cover with tape or otherwise obstruct the coans
intake vents (marked as AIR INTAKE).  
Intake vents  
Intake vents  
Preparing the Lens  
As much as possible, attach and remove the lens quickly and in a clean environment free of dust. Refer also to  
the instruction manual of the lens used.  
IMPORTANT  
• When attaching/removing a lens, avoid direct sunlight or strong light sources. Also, be careful not to drop the  
camcorder or lens.  
NOTES  
• Be careful not touch the lens mount or any components inside the lens mount area.  
• Replace the body cap to the lens mount immediately after removing the lens from the camcorder.  
• Keep the body cap clean and free from dust or dirt particles.  
       
Preparing the Camcorder  
# Attaching an EF Lens  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Remove the body cap from the camcorder and any  
dust caps from the lens.  
33  
3 Attach the lens to the camcorder and turn the lens  
in the direction of the arrow until it clicks in place.  
• EF lenses: Align the red mark on the lens with the  
red EF Lens mount index mark on the camcorder.  
• EF-S lenses: Align the white mark on the lens with  
the white EF-S Lens mount index mark on the  
camcorder.  
NOTES  
• Turning on the image stabilization function of an EF  
lens may reduce the effective usage time of the  
battery pack. When image stabilization is not  
necessary, for example if the camcorder is fixed to a tripod, it is recommended to turn it off.  
• Depending on the lens used, you may experience one or more of the following limitations.  
- The lens model name may be shortened when displayed on the creen.  
- You may not be able to focus manually when the focus mode ch is set to AF.  
- You may not be able to use the focus preset functior telepoto lenses).  
- You may not be able to use the power zoom function lens.  
# Removing an EF Lens  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Hold down the lens release button aturn e lens all the  
way in the direction of the arrow until it s.  
3 Remove the lens and replace the body cap to the  
camcorder and the dust cap to the lens.  
# Peripheral Illumination Correction  
Depending on the characteristics of the lens used, the image  
around the corners of the picture may seem darker due to light  
fall-off or peripheral illumination drop. If the camcorder has  
correction data available for the EF lens used, it can apply this  
correction data to compensate as necessary.  
Operating modes:  
1 Attach the lens you want to use.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
2 Open the peripheral illumination correction screen.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Periph. Illum. Corr.]  
• If correction data is available, the lens model name will appear on the  
screen.  
[Periph. Illum. Corr.]  
[Off]  
• If correction data is not available, [Periph. Illum. Corr.] will appear  
grayed out. Visit your local Canon Web site and check if there is  
correction data available for the lens you are using. If so, download the necessary update package and  
upgrade the camcorders firmware following the instructions supplied therein.  
3 Select [On] and then press SET.  
 
Preparing the Camcorder  
• As long as [~ Camera Setup] > [Periph. Illum. Corr.] is set to [On], the camcorder will automatically apply  
the appropriate correction data.  
NOTES  
34  
• About lens correction data:  
- The camcorder contains a register of correction data for compatible lenses that were available at the time  
the camcorder went on sale. Correction data for future lenses will be made available as part of the regular  
updates released for the camcorders firmware. For more details, visit your local Canon Web site.  
- Depending on the recording conditions, noise may appear in the periphery of the image as a result of the  
correction.  
- The level of correction will be lower for lenses that cannot provide distance information.  
- The level of correction will be lower the higher the ISO speed/gain setting used.  
- No correction will be applied when correction data is not available for the lens attached.  
- When using EF-S lenses, peripheral illumination fall-off may be more pronounced.  
- When using non-Canon lenses, peripheral illumination will not be corrected.  
$ Attaching a PL Lens  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Hold a bayonet ring handle and turn the bayonet ring  
counter-clockwise to remove the body cap and remove  
any dust caps from the lens.  
3 Attach the lens to the camcorder aligning a groove on t
lens with the PL lens index pin on the mount.  
4 Turn the bayonet ring clockwise to fix the lens
Attaching and Removing the Moitor Unit  
You can attach the monitor unit to the accessory shoe on  
the camcorder or that on the handle unit. Further ahead you  
will find details about using the LCD panel and adjusting the  
LCD screen (A 36).  
Attaching the Monitor Unit  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Insert the attachment base of the monitor unit to the  
camcorders or the handle units accessory shoe.  
• Use the attachment base at the bottom of the monitor  
unit to attach it directly to the camcorder. Use the  
attachment base at the back of monitor unit to attach it  
to the accessory shoe on the front of the handle unit.  
3 Tighten the monitor units lock screw.  
4 Connect the monitor units cables to the camcorder.  
• Connect cable number 1 (with the white line) to the  
camcorders EXT 1 terminal and cable number 2 to the  
EXT 2 terminal.  
     
Preparing the Camcorder  
Removing the Monitor Unit  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Disconnect the monitor units cables from the camcorders EXT 1 and EXT 2 terminals.  
• Pull back the metallic tips of the cable to release the cable and then disconnect the cable.  
3 Unscrew the lock screw and then gently slide out the monitor unit from the accessory shoe.  
35  
Using the Viewfinder  
Adjusting the Viewfinder’s Position  
1 Gently pull out the viewfinder until it stops.  
2 Raise the viewfinder slightly and pull it out all the way.  
3 Adjust the viewfinders angle as necessary.  
• The viewfinder unit can be adjusted up to 60º vertically.  
Attaching and Detaching the Eye Cup  
Attach the eye cup so that it covers the rubber thviewfinder  
unit.  
• The dioptric adjustment dial can be perated evh the eye cup  
attached.  
• For left eye use, attach the eye cup so tat e protruding portion faces  
the opposite side.  
Eye cup  
Viewfinder  
unit  
Detach the eye cup as shown in the illustration.  
     
Preparing the Camcorder  
Dioptric Adjustment  
Dioptric  
adjustment  
dial  
Turn on the camcorder and adjust the dioptric adjustment dial.  
36  
Attaching the Viewfinder Cap  
Pointing the viewfinder lens at the sun or other strong light sources may  
cause damage to internal components. When you are not using the  
viewfinder, make sure to attach the viewfinder cap to the viewfinder. This  
will also protect the viewfinder from scratches and dirt. Attach the  
viewfinder cap by inserting it into the rubber portion of the viewfinder unit.  
Using the LCD Panel  
The whole monitor unit can be rotated 270º sideways allowing for e
monitoring and operation from the side of the camcordernally, te  
independently articulated LCD panel can be rotated 180º ys and  
270º up and down. In combination, you can posLCpanel at a  
comfortable angle whatever the shooting style y
1 Rotate the monitor unit sideways o the desirgle.  
2 Open the LCD panel and adjust thscreeto the desired position.  
Adjusting the LCD Panel for Shoulder Mounted Use  
1 Open the LCD panel 90º until it is perpendicular to the monitor unit.  
2 Rotate the LCD panel 180º left.  
3 Rotate the LCD panel 180º forward.  
4 Press the MIRROR button until the image is displayed in the correct  
orientation.  
• Repeatedly pressing the MIRROR button will change the displayed  
image in the following order: Image inverted horizontally ´ Image  
inverted horizontally and vertically ´ Image inverted vertically ´  
Original image.  
You can use the viewfinder and watch  
the LCD screen at the same time  
NOTES  
You can set the LCD screen to black & white (A 37).  
• When you use a commercially available lens adapter and the image on the screen is inverted, you can use the  
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Scan Reverse Rec] setting to return the image to the correct  
orientation.  
• If you are not interested in using the viewfinder while the monitor unit is attached, you can set [£ LCD/VF  
Setup] > [LCD/VF Simul.] to [Off] to conserve the camcorders power. Even when [LCD/VF Simul.] is set to  
[Off], closing the LCD panel will automatically activate the viewfinder.  
       
Preparing the Camcorder  
• While recording with the LCD panel rotated in a different direction or angle (for example, facing toward the  
subject), you can press the MIRROR button repeatedly to invert the image on the screen horizontally, vertically  
or both ways.  
37  
Adjusting the Viewfinder/LCD Screen  
[£ LCD/VF Setup]  
You can adjust the brightness, contrast, color, sharpness, and backlight  
of the viewfinder and LCD screen independently of each other. These  
adjustments will not affect your recordings.  
[LCD Setup]  
[VF Setup]  
Operating modes:  
[Brightness: 0]  
[Contrast: 0]  
[Color: 0]  
[Sharpness: 2]  
[Backlight: Normal]  
1 Open the setup menu for the viewfinder or LCD screen.  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [LCD Setup] or [VF Setup]  
2 Select [Brightness], [Contrast], [Color], [Sharpness] or [Backlight] and  
then press SET.  
3 Adjust the setting and then press SET.  
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other settings as necessary.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [LCD Setup] or [VF A 99you can press the button to open the  
respective submenu.  
Setting the Screen to Black & Wit
[£ LCD/VF Setup]  
The viewfinder and LCD screen displain color by t but you can set  
them to black & white. Even when the creen iblack & white, onscreen  
text and icons will still be displayed in col.  
[LCD/VF B&W]  
[Off]  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [LCD/VF B&W] submenu.  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [LCD/VF B&W]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [LCD/VF B&W] (A 99), you can press the button to turn the black & white  
display on and off.  
5.5 mm  
Using a Tripod  
The camcorder is shipped with the TB-1 Tripod Base for tripods with 0.95 cm (3/8 in.)  
screws. You can mount the camcorder on a tripod but do not use tripods with mounting  
screws longer than 5.5 mm (0.2 in.) as this may cause damage to the camcorder.  
             
Preparing the Camcorder  
Using a Tripod with 0.64 cm (1/4 in.) Mounting  
Screws  
To use a tripod with 0.64 cm (1/4 in.) mounting screws, first  
attach the supplied tripod adapter base to the camcorder and  
then attach the tripod to the adapter base.  
38  
1 Remove the original TB-1 tripod base from the camcorder.  
• Remove the 4 screws and then remove the base.  
2 Attach the supplied tripod adapter base for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.)  
tripods.  
• Firmly screw in the 4 screws.  
3 Attach the tripod.  
• Firmly screw in the tripod screw.  
Removing and Attaching the Grip Unit  
The grip unit comes originally attached to the camcorder. You can remove it and replace it with the thumb rest  
should the minimal configuration be necessary.  
Removing the Grip Unit  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Unscrew the grip units lock screw and gently
the grip unit.  
• The grip unit contains an internal cnnection
so be sure not to pull it too forcefu.  
3 Disconnect the grip units connection pg.  
4 Screw the thumb rest onto the camcorder.  
Attaching the Grip Unit  
The grip unit can be attached in any of 24 positions (at  
15º intervals) to give you a convenient grip angle for  
high- and low-angle shooting.  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Unscrew the thumb rest and remove it from the  
camcorder.  
3 Firmly insert the grip units plug all the way into the  
grip unit connection terminal on the camcorder.  
• If the plug is not correctly connected, all the  
controls on the camcorder may be disabled.  
4 Attach the grip unit to the camcorder aligning it at the desired angle and tighten the grip units lock screw.  
     
Preparing the Camcorder  
Adjusting the Grip Belt  
Adjust the grip belt so that you can reach the START/STOP button  
on the grip unit with your index finger but still have a comfortable but  
secure grip.  
39  
IMPORTANT  
• Be careful not to drop the camcorder when adjusting the grip belt.  
Attaching the Handle Unit  
1 Insert the attachment base at the bottom of the handle unit to the  
camcorders accessory shoe.  
2 Tighten the handle units lock screw while gently pressing it down.  
NOTES  
• You can use the accessory shoe or the socket for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.)  
screws on the handle unit to attach a variety of commercially availle  
accessories.  
Attaching a Shoulder Strap  
Pass the ends through the strap munt and e length of  
the strap.  
IMPORTANT  
• Be careful not to drop the camcorder when attaching or adjusting the  
shoulder strap.  
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Covers  
You can remove the plastic covers of the following terminals and SD card slot to access them more readily.  
• EXT 1 and EXT 2  
• SYNC OUT  
× (headphones)  
• DC IN  
• GENLOCK and TIME CODE  
• HD/SD SDI  
• CH1 and CH2  
• SD card slot  
• REMOTE and HDMI OUT  
• MIC  
(XLR terminals on the monitor unit)  
• WFT  
Removing the Terminal Covers  
Open the terminal cover and gently pull it straight out.  
             
Preparing the Camcorder  
Attaching the Terminal Covers  
Insert the connecting strip into the opening to attach the terminal cover.  
40  
NOTES  
• If the connecting strip is difficult to grasp, use a pair of tweezers or similar  
tool.  
Preparing Recording Media  
Preparing Recording Media  
The camcorder records clips to 1 CompactFlash (CF) cards and photos* to . SD and / SDHC memory  
cards. The camcorder is equipped with two CF card slots. Initialize recording media (A 43) when you use them  
with this camcorder for the first time.  
* The camcorder can record custom picture files and a camera settings file onto the SD card as well. The SD card serves also to  
store user memo files created with the supplied software Canon XF Utility that you can then read and embed in the clips’  
metadata.  
41  
Compatible CF cards  
You can use UDMA-compatible* Type I CF cards with a capacity of at least 512 MB with the camcorder. For  
more details on cards that can be used, visit your local Canon Web site.  
* The Ultra Direct Memory Access (UDMA) specification allows data to be transferred between the CF card and device at high  
transfer speeds (measured in MB/s). Depending on the CF card, you may not be able to record even when using a UDMA-  
comptaible CF card.  
NOTES  
• Proper operation cannot be guaranteed for all CF cards.  
Inserting a CF Card  
You can insert a CF card into CF card slot A or slot B. If you have tCF  
cards, you can use both slots.  
1 Slide the CF card slot cover switch in the on he arrow.  
• The CF card slot cover will open upward (sownard  
(slot B).  
2 Insert the CF card straight, with te label facing up, all the way into  
the slot.  
3 Close the CF card slot cover.  
• Do not force the cover closed if the CF card is not correctly inserted.  
Checking the Status of the CF Card Slots  
You can check the status of the CF card slots immediately by looking at the  
CF2/CF3 access indicator. Refer to the following table.  
Access indicator color  
Red  
CF card slot status  
Accessing CF card.  
Recording/playback is possible and the CF card slot is selected  
for recording/playback.  
Green  
A CF card is not inserted, the CF card slot is not currently  
selected, or the CF card is not being accessed.  
Indicator off  
           
Preparing Recording Media  
Removing a CF card  
1 Wait until the access indicator for the card slot with the CF card  
to be removed is off.  
,
42  
2 Slide the CF card slot cover switch in the direction of the arrow.  
• The CF card slot cover will open upward (slot A) or downward (slot B).  
3 Push the CF card release button.  
• The release button partially pops out.  
4 Push in the CF card release button to release the CF card.  
5 Pull the CF card all the way out and close the CF card slot cover.  
,
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access  
indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do so may result in permanent  
data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not open the cover of the CF card slot being accessed.  
NOTES  
• If you set the [w Other Functions] > [Media Access LED] functio[Off], the access indicators will not  
illuminate.  
Inserting and Removing an SD Card  
1 Turn off the camcorder.  
2 Open the SD card slot cover.  
SD card access  
indicator  
3 Insert the SD card all the way into the SD card slot until it clicks.  
• The SD card slot is positioned at angle. Align the SD card straight in  
relation to the SD card slot, with the label facing the lens.  
4 Close the SD card slot cover.  
• Do not force the cover closed if the SD card is not correctly inserted.  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing. Failure to do so may result in  
permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not remove the SD card.  
• Turn off the camcorder before inserting or removing an SD card. Inserting or removing the SD card with the  
camcorder on may result in permanent data loss.  
• SD cards have front and back sides that are not interchangeable. Inserting an SD card facing the wrong  
direction can cause a malfunction of the camcorder. Be sure to insert the SD card as described in step 3.  
NOTES  
To remove the SD card: Push the SD card once to release it. When the SD card springs out, pull it all the way  
out.  
• If you set the [w Other Functions] > [Media Access LED] function to [Off], the access indicators will not  
illuminate.  
       
Preparing Recording Media  
Initializing the Recording Media  
The first time you use any recording media with this camcorder, initialize it first. You can also initialize a recording  
media to permanently delete all the data it contains.  
When initializing an SD card, you can select quick initialization, which clears the file allocation table but does not  
physically erase the stored data, or complete initialization, which deletes all data completely.  
43  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Initialize Media] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Initialize Media]  
[w Other Functions]  
2 Select [CF A], [CF B] or [SD Card] and then press SET.  
[Initialize Media]  
To initialize a CF card  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
• The CF card is initialized and all the data it contains is erased.  
To initialize an SD card  
3 Select [Complete] (complete initialization) or [Quick] (quick initialization) and then press SET.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• If you are using the [Complete] initialization option, preSET twto cancel the operation while it is in  
progress. You can use the SD card but all data will d.  
5 When the confirmation message appearsSE
• The SD card is initialized and all the data it s ersed.  
IMPORTANT  
• Initializing a recording media will permnently rase all data, including clips with an $ mark, protected photos,  
and custom picture files. Lost data cannot be recovered. Make sure you save important recordings in  
advance.  
• Depending on the SD card, the complete initialization may take up to a few minutes.  
NOTES  
• While recording on a CF card, you can initialize another CF card in the other CF card slot.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Initialize Media] (A 99), you can press the button to open the initialization  
submenu.  
Switching Between the CF Card Slots  
The camcorder features two CF card slots, CF2 (CF card slot A) and  
CF3 (CF card slot B). If both slots contain a CF card, you can switch  
between them as necessary.  
Operating modes:  
       
Preparing Recording Media  
Press the SLOT SELECT button.  
• The access indicator of the selected CF card slot will illuminate in green. On the screen, the CF card selected  
is indicated with a Ð mark next to CF card icon and in the rear panel, with a Î mark on top of the CF card  
icon.  
44  
NOTES  
• If both CF card slots contain a CF card and you open the cover of the selected  
slot, the camcorder will automatically switch to the other slot.  
You cannot use the SLOT SELECT button to switch between CF card slots  
while recording.  
• When using an optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter, you can also switch  
between CF card slots remotely by pressing [SLOT SELECT] on the Wi-Fi  
Remote screen.  
Selecting the CF Card Recording Method  
The camcorder features two useful CF card recording methods, relay recording and double slot recording.  
Relay recording: This allows you to continue recording on another CF card without interruption if the CF card you  
are using becomes full. Relay recording is available from CF card slot to CF card slot B, and vice versa.  
Double slot recording: This records the same clip simultaneoy to bCF cards, which is a convenient way to  
make a backup copy of your recording while you record.  
Operating modes:  
To use relay recording  
[w Other Functions]  
By default, this function is activated. If it as beedeactivated, follow the  
procedure below to activate it.  
[Relay Rec]  
1 Open the [Relay Rec] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Relay Rec]  
[On]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
To use double slot recording  
[w Other Functions]  
[Double Slot Rec]  
[Off]  
1 Open the [Double Slot Rec] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Double Slot Rec]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
NOTES  
• When the bit rate is set to 50 Mbps (A 55), relay recording is not  
available during slow motion recording.  
• If a CF card becomes full during double slot recording, recording on both cards will stop. On the other hand, if  
an error occurs with one of the cards, recording will continue on the other card.  
• Double slot recording cannot be used with relay recording or slow & fast motion recording.  
       
Preparing Recording Media  
Checking the Available Recording Time  
When the camcorder is in  
mode, the display on the upper left of the screen indicates which CF card slot  
is in use and the available recording time (in minutes*) that remains on each CF card. The same information is  
displayed in the rear panel. When the camcorder is in  
in the rear panel.  
mode, the available recording time is displayed only  
45  
On the [Media] status screen (A 158), you can check the available recording time, total space and used space  
of each recording media, and the available number of photos.  
* The approximate available recording time is based on the current bit rate (A 55).  
Recovering Data on the CF Card  
Some actions, such as suddenly turning off the camcorder or removing the CF card while data is being  
recorded, can cause data errors on the CF card. In such case, you may be able to recover the data on the CF  
card.  
Operating modes:  
1 Insert the CF card with the data to be recovered into the camcorder.  
2 When the screen prompts you to recover the data, select [Yeand then press SET.  
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
NOTES  
• This procedure will delete clips shorter than 1s in ength. Additionally, up to 10 seconds will be  
deleted from the end of clips on the CF ard.  
• In some cases, data may not be recvered, sucen the FAT32 file system is corrupted or the CF card is  
physically damaged.  
• While recording on a CF card, you can cor data from another CF card by inserting it into the other CF card  
slot.  
     
Adjusting the Black Balance  
Adjusting the Black Balance  
You can have the camcorder adjust the black balance automatically when ambient temperature changes  
considerably or if there is a noticeable change in a true black video signal.  
46  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [ABB] screen.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[~ Camera Setup] > [ABB]  
[ABB]  
2 Attach the body cap to the lens mount.  
• If a lens was attached, remove the lens and replace the body cap.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The automatic black balance procedure will start.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
• If the body cap is not correctly attached, [Error] will appear on the screen. Press SET and repeat the  
procedure from the beginning.  
NOTES  
• Adjusting the black balance may be necessary in the following case
- When using the camcorder for the very first time or after a lopod of not using it.  
- After sudden or extreme changes in ambient temperat
- After changing the ISO speed/gain settings.  
• The automatic black balance procedure will taoximely 40 seconds when the frame rate is set to  
23.98P or 24.00P.  
• During the adjustment of the black bance, you ce some irregular displays appear on the screen. This  
is not a malfunction.  
• Resetting the camcorders settings usg the w Other Functions] > [Reset] > [All Settings] or [Camera  
Settings] menu option will reset also the bbalance adjustment. In such case, perform the procedure again.  
   
Remote Operation Via the Wi-Fi Remote Application  
Remote Operation Via the Wi-Fi Remote Application  
You can attach an optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter to the camcorder and operate  
the camcorder remotely via Wi-Fi Remote, a Web browser application that can be accessed  
using the Web browser on any device compatible with Wi-Fi networks*. The Wi-Fi Remote  
application lets you monitor the image through live view, start and stop recording and  
remotely control the shutter speed, ISO speed/gain and other settings. You can also create,  
edit and transfer a metadata profile, set various shot marks and check the recording media,  
remaining recording time, time code, etc.  
47  
* For details about compatible devices, operating systems, Web browsers, etc. please visit your local Canon  
Web site.  
Operating modes:  
Preparing the System for Wi-FRemote  
To be able to operate the camcorder remotely via the Wi-Fi Remote application you will need to attach an  
optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter to the camcorders WFT terminal and complete the wireless network  
setup. Download ‘WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter - Guide for Canon Camcorders’ (PDF file) from your local  
Canon Web site and follow the instructions to complete the necessary setup.  
     
Remote Operation Via the Wi-Fi Remote Application  
48  
Recording  
3
49  
Recording Video  
This section explains the recording basics. Before you begin recording, make a test recording first to check if the  
camcorder operates correctly. Record for approximately 6 minutes at 50 Mbps (A 55). Should the camcorder  
fail to operate correctly, refer to Troubleshooting (A 162).  
For details on recording audio, refer to Recording Audio (A 80).  
Operating modes:  
Preparing to Record  
1 Attach the monitor unit, handle unit, grip unit, etc. as necessary to build the  
desired configuration (A 32).  
2 Attach a charged battery pack to the camcorder (A 24).  
3 Insert a CF card into a CF card slot (A 41).  
• Insert another CF card into the other CF card slot to y recong (A 44) or  
double slot recording (A 44).  
4 Attach a lens (A 32, 34).  
5 Adjust the viewfinder.  
NOTES  
• The camcorder can add a user memo (A 85) to a clip as you record. It can be used to store information such  
as the clip name, camera operator and filming location. However, you must set the user memo before  
recording.  
Recording  
1 Set the Q switch to CAMERA (A 26).  
• The camcorder turns on in  
record pause mode.  
mode and enters  
• The access indicator for the CF card slot selected for  
recording illuminates in red and then changes to green.  
Tally lamp  
Access indicators  
           
Recording Video  
2 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• Recording starts. The tally lamp illuminates and the recording  
indicator [ÜREC] appears at the top of the screen.  
• You can use the START/STOP button on the back of the  
camcorder, the front of the camcorder (next to the lens  
mount), the grip unit or the monitor unit.  
50  
3 Press the START/STOP button to pause the recording.  
• The clip* is recorded to the CF card and the camcorder enters  
record pause mode. The tally lamp will also go out.  
* “Clip” refers to one movie unit from the point you press the START/STOP  
button to start recording until you press again to pause the recording. You can  
also include custom picture settings (A 101) and metadata (A 85) with the  
clip.  
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 47) you can start and stop recording from a Wi-Fi-enabled  
device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.  
1 Press [LIVE VIEW ON/OFF] to show the camcorder’s live view mage on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.  
2 Press [START/STOP] to begin recording.  
• The recording operation indicator changes from [STBÜREC]he center of the START/STOP button  
lights up in red and the time code display startunninhe Wi-Fi Remote screen.  
• Press [START/STOP] again to pause the rec
Recording operation  
Time code  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do  
so may result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not open the CF card slot cover of the CF card slot being accessed and remove the CF card.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
• Be sure to save your recordings regularly (A 132), especially after making important recordings. Canon shall  
not be liable for any loss or corruption of data.  
NOTES  
You can use [w Other Functions] > [Rec Review] (A 92) to review part or all of the last clip recorded.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 99), you can press the button to add  
an $ mark or % mark to the last clip recorded.  
 
Recording Video  
You can use [w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Delete Last Clip] (A 153) to delete the last clip recorded.  
However, you cannot delete the last clip if double slot recording is on.  
• When you set the [w Other Functions] > [SDI Rec Command] setting to [On] and you connect the  
camcorder to another device using the HD/SD SDI terminal, if you start or stop recording with the camcorder,  
the other device will also start or stop recording.  
51  
Locking the Controls in Recording Mode  
Once in  
mode, you can set the Q switch to C (key lock)  
to lock all the physical controls (buttons and switches) on the  
camcorder*, save for the START/STOP button. In such case, you can  
use Wi-Fi Remote to operate the camcorder. This is useful in  
preventing settings from being changed due to inadvertently pressing  
one of the buttons. Return the Q switch to the CAMERA  
position to reactivate the controls.  
* The Wi-Fi Remote application also has a key lock function that is limited only to  
the controls on the applications screens (you will still be able to use the controls  
on the camcorder). Press [ ] to lock the applications controls; press [C] to  
reactivate them.  
About Clips  
When the camcorder records a clip, it also assigns a 6-charactclname consisting of a 2-character prefix  
(letters or numerals) and 4 numerals (for example, “AA00. The l4 numbers serve as a running counter  
that increases every time a clip is recorded. You can seial clip ame in advance using the [w Other  
Functions] > [Clips] > [Title Prefix] and [NumbSettinttings. You cannot change the clip name after  
the clip is recorded.  
NOTES  
• If you are recording with two CF cas and e CF card you are using becomes full while recording, the clip  
will continue uninterrupted on the othCcard when relay recording (A 44) is activated. In such case,  
the recording will be recorded as separate clips.  
• If you record using the custom picture and metadata settings, those settings will be recorded with the clip.  
For more details, refer to Custom Picture Settings (A 101) and Using Metadata (A 85).  
• The video (stream) file in a clip will be split approximately every 2 GB for clips with a long recording time  
(approximately every 1 GB during slow motion recording). Even in such case, playback will be continuous.  
     
Recording Video  
Onscreen Displays  
Refer to this section for an explanation of the various screen displays that appear in  
mode. You can use  
the custom display function (A 110) to turn off individual onscreen displays if they are not required.  
52  
10  
11  
12 13  
14  
1
2
3
4
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
5
6
7
8
9
23  
24  
25  
26 27 28 29  
30  
When displaying the date and time (A 28):  
31  
1
2
3
Remaining battery time (A 53)  
CF card status/available recording te (A 3)  
Remaining recording time for double st  
recording (A 44)  
# Current focal length of an attached EF lens*  
ND filter (A 63)  
View assistance (A 109)  
Custom picture (A 101)  
Key lock (A 51)  
White balance (A 66)  
16 SD card status  
17 Bit rate/Resolution (A 55)  
18 Frame rate (A 55)  
19 Output displays (A 130)  
20 SDI recording command (A 155)  
21 User memo (A 85)  
4
5
6
7
8
9
22 User bit (A 76)  
23 Audio output channel (A 131)  
24 Audio level meter (A 82, 83)  
25 # Aperture value (A 64)  
26 ISO speed/Gain (A 61)  
27 Magnification (A 70)  
28 Shutter speed (A 58)  
29 Peaking (A 70)  
10 Wi-Fi ** (A 47) white - connected to a Wi-Fi  
network; yellow - connecting to or disconnecting  
from a Wi-Fi network.  
11 Recording operation (A 53)  
12 Character recording (A 110)  
13 Genlock (A 77)  
30 Audio peak limiter (A 82)  
31 Date/time (A 28)  
14 Time code (A 73)  
15 Interval counter (A 93)  
* The displayed value is an estimate.  
**Only when an optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter is connected to the camcorder.  
NOTES  
• You can press the DISP. button to turn onscreen displays on and off.  
   
Recording Video  
1 Remaining battery time  
• The icon shows a rough estimate of the remaining charge as a percentage of the full charge of the battery  
pack. The remaining recording/playback time of the battery pack is displayed, in minutes, next to the icon.  
53  
è é ê ë ì (in red).  
When ì is displayed, replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.  
• Depending on the conditions under which the camcorder and the battery pack are used, the actual  
battery charge may not be indicated accurately.  
2 CF card status/available recording time  
• The following indicates the CF card status.  
2/3 Can record on CF card  
4/5 No CF card or cannot record on CF card  
The CF card selected for recording is indicated with a Ð mark.  
11 Recording operation  
ÜREC  
Recording  
STBY  
Record pause  
ÜINT REC  
INT STBY (INT flashes)  
ÜFRM REC  
ÜFRM STBY  
Interval recording  
Interval record pause  
Frame recording  
Frame record pause (after startinrecord
FRM STBY (FRM flashes) Frame record pause (before ecordin)  
ÜS&F REC  
S&F STBY  
Slow & fast motion reng  
Slow & fast motion use  
ÜPRE REC  
PRE REC STBY  
Pre-recordg fter e START/STOP button)  
Pre-recorng (before pg the START/STOP button)  
• When double slot recording (A 4is acated, the 4 icon will appear to the left of the operation indicator.  
Rear Panel Displays  
You can check the following information on the rear panel. This allows you to easily adjust main camera functions  
like the shutter speed, white balance and ISO speed/gain even when the monitor unit is not attached to the  
camcorder without having to use the viewfinder.  
5 6  
7
8
9
1
10  
11  
2
3
12  
4
           
Recording Video  
1
2
White balance (A 66)  
8
9
# Aperture value (A 64)  
ND filter (A 63)  
Time code settings: NDF Non-drop frame (A 74)  
/EXT-LOCK External time code signal locked  
(A 78) / HOLD Time code display on hold  
(A 74)  
1
10 Approximate remaining battery time  
11 Wi-Fi (A 47)  
12 CF card status and available recording time  
4
54  
1
3
4
5
6
7
Time code (A 73)  
Audio level meter (A 82, 83)  
White balance fine-tuning (A 66)  
1
ISO speed/  
Gain (A 61)  
Shutter speed (A 58)/White balance  
2
Shutter speed (mode set to [Speed], [Slow]  
or [Off])  
Shutter speed (mode set to [Angle])  
Shutter speed (mode set to [Clear Scan])  
3
White balance fine-tuning (A 66)  
3
White balance, color temperature (A 67)  
1
Displayed also in  
In these shutter speed modes, only the denominator is displayed -  
Only displayed while adjusting the setting.  
mode.  
2
3
4
indicates a shutter speed of 1/100, etc.  
Only when an optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter is connected to the camcorder.  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Rear Panel  
Repeatedly pressing the  
(backlight) button will change rightns of  
the rear panel in the following order: Backlight on (brightklight
(dim) Backlight off.  
CINEMA Preset  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[/ CINEMA Locked]  
[Off]  
You can easily set the camcorder to use a number of preset picture-  
related settings especially designed with professional cinematography  
and motion picture production in mind. When you use the CINEMA preset  
settings, the camcorder will use the advanced Canon Log gamma  
(A 109) that makes full use of the new image sensor to achieve an  
amazing dynamic range. On the other hand, other custom picture settings  
will not be available.  
1 Open the [/ CINEMA Locked] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [/ CINEMA Locked]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
• All picture-related settings will be set according to the CINEMA preset values.  
• [/ LOCKED] appears on the left of the screen.  
NOTES  
• When Canon Log gamma is used, the image displayed on the screen will appear darker than usual. You can  
use the view assistance function (A 109) to display an image that approximates the one that would be  
obtained using a normal gamma setting.  
   
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Bit Rate, Resolution and Frame Rate  
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Bit Rate, Resolution and  
Frame Rate  
Before you record, select the bit rate, resolution (frame size) and frame rate that best match your creative needs.  
The options available will depend on the type of recordings you select: NTSC-compatible, PAL-compatible or  
true 24.00P recordings. A single CF card can contain only one type of recordings.  
55  
Operating modes:  
Selecting the Type of Recording  
For true 24.00P recordings  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [24.00P] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [24.00P]  
[24.00P]  
[Off]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
• The camcorder will reset and restart in 24.00P mode.  
For recordings compatible with analog NTSC/PAL broadcast  
standards  
[w Other Functions]  
[NTSC/PAL]  
1 Open the [NTSC/PAL] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [NTSC/PAL]  
2 Select [NTSC] or [PAL] and then press SET.  
• The camcorder will reset and restart in the mode
[NTSC] or [PAL]*  
*Depending on the country/region  
of purchase.  
Selecting the Bit Rate and Resolution  
[w Other Functions]  
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[50 Mbps 1920x1080]  
1 Open the [Bit Rate/Resolution] submenu to set the bit rate and  
resolution.  
[w Other Functions] > [Bit Rate/Resolution]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• The selected bit rate and resolution will appear on the upper right of  
the screen.  
Selecting the Frame Rate  
[w Other Functions]  
[Frame Rate]  
This procedure is not necessary for true 24.00P recordings.  
1 Open the [Frame Rate] submenu to set the frame rate.  
[w Other Functions] > [Frame Rate]  
[59.94i] or [50.00i]*  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• The selected frame rate will appear on the upper right of the screen.  
*Depending on the country/region  
of purchase.  
NOTES  
• A single CF card cannot be used to record different types of recordings (NTSC/PAL/24.00P).  
• For details on the signal output from each terminal, refer to Video Output Configuration (A 127).  
     
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Bit Rate, Resolution and Frame Rate  
Available bit rate, resolution and frame rate settings  
[24.00P]set  
[NTSC/PAL] set to [NTSC]  
to [On]  
[NTSC/PAL] set to [PAL]  
Bit rate*  
Resolution  
56  
Frame rate  
[Frame Rate] setting  
24.00P  
59.94i  
Ü
59.94P  
29.97P  
Ü
23.98P  
Ü
50.00i  
50.00P  
25.00P  
1920 x 1080  
1280 x 720  
1920 x 1080  
1280 x 720  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
50 Mbps  
(CBR 4:2:2)  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
35 Mbps  
(VBR 4:2:0)  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
25 Mbps  
(CBR 4:2:0)  
1440 x 1080  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
* The first line indicates the bit rate (in Mbps); the second line indicates in parentheses whether the bit rate is constant (CBR) or  
variable (VBR), and the color sampling.  
Changing Main Camera Functions with the FUNC. Button  
Changing Main Camera Functions with the FUNC. Button  
You can adjust three main camera functions –shutter speed, white balance and ISO speed/gain– using the  
FUNC. button (direct setting mode). In direct setting mode, you can change settings using the LCD screen/  
viewfinder or using only the rear panel, which is convenient when the monitor unit is not attached to the  
camcorder.  
57  
This section will explain the basic operation of the direct setting mode. For specific details about the functions  
please refer to the each functions section: shutter speed (A 58), white balance (A 66), ISO speed/gain  
(A 61).  
Operating modes:  
Using the Direct Setting Mode  
1 Press the FUNC. button.  
On the screen: The onscreen display of the function to be adjusted  
will be highlighted in orange.  
On the rear panel: Only the icon (white balance) or value (ISO  
speed, gain, shutter speed) of the function to be adjusted will b
displayed.  
• Repeatedly pressing the FUNC. button will change tction t
be adjusted in the following order: White balance Ied/gain  
Shutter speed Direct setting mode off.  
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SEto elect the  
desired value (ISO speed, gain, utter spesired white balance mode and then press SET.  
• The selected value will be set and he camcorder will exit the direct setting mode.  
On the screen: The onscreen disply of tselected function will return to normal.  
On the rear panel: The display will return to normal (all displays will reappear).  
• Depending on the function selected, additional adjustment may be possible or necessary before pressing  
SET.  
NOTES  
• The camcorder will automatically end the direct setting mode in the following cases.  
- If no operation was performed for more than 6 seconds.  
- If the aperture was adjusted or the ND filter setting was changed.  
- If the menu, custom picture menu or a status screen was opened.  
- If the control dials function is set to [ISO/Gain] and you operate the control dial while adjusting the white  
balance or shutter speed in direct setting mode.  
• If you set an assignable button to [FUNC.] (A 99), you can press that button instead of the FUNC. button to  
enter the direct setting mode.  
     
Shutter Speed  
Shutter Speed  
Set the shutter speed based on the recording conditions. For example, you may want to set slower shutter  
speeds in darker environments. The camcorder offers the following 5 modes.  
58  
Operating modes:  
[Speed]: Allows you to set the shutter speed (in fractions of a second). You can select the increment to use when  
adjusting the shutter speed between 1/3-stop and 1/4-stop increments.  
[Angle]: You can set the shutter angle to determine the shutter speed.  
[Clear Scan]: Set the frequency in order to record CRT computer monitors without displaying black bands or  
flicker on the screen.  
[Slow]: You can set slower shutter speeds to obtain brighter recordings in places with insufficient lighting. This  
mode is not available during slow & fast motion recording mode.  
[Off]: The camcorder uses a standard shutter speed based on the frame rate.  
Available Shutter Speeds  
The available shutter speeds vary depending on the frame rate.  
Frame rate (NTSC and recordings)  
Shutter speed mode  
59.94i / 59.94P  
.97P  
23.98P / 24.00P  
1
Off  
Speed  
1/60  
1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/20/40, 0, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80,  
increments 1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 160/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250,  
1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1600, /200500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800,  
1/1600, 1/2000 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000  
1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/100, 120, 1/151/30, 1/34, 1/40, 1/48, 1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/24, 1/30, 1/34, 1/40, 1/48, 1/60, 1/75,  
1/30  
1/24  
1,2  
1/3-stop  
1/4-stop  
increments 1/180, 1/210, 1/250, 1/300, 60,  
1/420, 1/500, 1/600, 1/720, 1/840,  
1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1700,  
1/2000  
1/100, 1/120, 1/150, 1/180, 1/210, 1/250, 1/90, 1/100, 1/120, 1/150, 1/180, 1/210,  
1/300, 1/360, 1/420, 1/500, 1/600, 1/720, 1/250, 1/300, 1/360, 1/420, 1/500, 1/600,  
1/840, 1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1700, 1/720,1/840, 1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400,  
1/2000  
1/1700, 1/2000  
1
Angle  
360°, 240°, 216°, 180°, 120°, 90°, 360°, 240°, 216°, 180°, 120°, 108°, 360°, 345.6°, 288°, 240°, 180°,  
60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°, 15°, 11.25°  
90°, 60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°, 15°,  
11.25°  
172.8°, 144°, 120°, 90°, 86.4°, 72°,  
60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°, 15°, 11.25°  
23.98 Hz or 24.00 Hz to 250.27 Hz  
1/3, 1/6, 1/12  
1
Clear Scan  
59.94 Hz to 250.27 Hz  
1/4, 1/8, 1/15, 1/30  
29.97Hz to 250.27 Hz  
1/4, 1/8, 1/15  
3
Slow  
Frame rate (PAL recordings)  
1/25  
Shutter speed mode  
50.00i / 50.00P  
1/50  
25.00P  
1
Off  
1,2  
Speed  
1/3-stop  
1/50, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160,  
increments 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,  
1/2000  
1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000,  
1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000  
1/4-stop  
1/50, 1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/100, 1/120, 1/150, 1/180, 1/210,  
1/25, 1/29, 1/33, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/100, 1/120,  
1/150, 1/180, 1/210, 1/250, 1/300, 1/350, 1/400, 1/500, 1/600,  
1/700, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1600, 1/2000  
increments 1/250, 1/300, 1/350, 1/400, 1/500, 1/600, 1/700, 1/800,  
1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1600, 1/2000  
1
Angle  
360°, 300°, 240°, 180°, 150°, 120°, 90°, 60°, 45°, 30°, 360°, 300°, 240°, 180°, 150°, 120°, 90°, 75°, 60°, 45°,  
22.5°, 15°, 11.25°  
50.00 Hz to 250.78 Hz  
1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/25  
30°, 22.5°, 15°, 11.25°  
25.00 Hz to 250.78 Hz  
1/3, 1/6, 1/12  
1
Clear Scan  
3
Slow  
1
2
3
During slow & fast motion recording mode, available values will vary depending on the selected shooting frame rate.  
In the Wi-Fi Remote application, all shutter speeds (1/3-stop and 1/4-stop increments) will be available from the same list.  
Not available during slow & fast motion recording mode.  
   
Shutter Speed  
Changing the Shutter Speed Mode and Value  
1 Open the shutter [Mode] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Shutter] > [Mode]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
59  
2 Select the desired mode and then press SET.  
[Shutter]  
[Mode]  
• If you selected [Speed] (the default value) you can select the  
increment scale to use when adjusting the shutter speed; otherwise,  
skip to step 5.  
3 Open the [Shutter Increment] submenu.  
[Speed]  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Shutter] > [Shutter Increment]  
4 Select [1/3 stop] or [1/4 stop] and then press SET.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Shutter]  
5 Adjust the shutter speed, angle value or clear scan frequency  
using the direct setting mode.  
• Repeatedly press the FUNC. button to highlight the shutter speed  
display, select the desired value and then press SET. For details refer  
to Using the Direct Setting Mode (A 57).  
[Shutter Increment]  
[1/4 stop]  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [FUNC. Shutter] (A 99), yoca
press the button to enter the direct setting mode with the shutter ed  
highlighted and ready to be adjusted.  
Remote Operation Using Wi-i Remo
After completing the necessary preparions (A 47) you can adjust the shutter speed remotely from a Wi-Fi-  
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote plicion.  
1 Press [SPEED] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.  
2 Select the desired mode.  
3 Press the current shutter speed, angle value or clear scan frequency and select the desired value  
from the list.  
You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.  
• The selected value will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camcorder.  
     
Shutter Speed  
Using Slow Shutter Mode  
When recording in dark surroundings, you can obtain a brighter picture by using slow shutter mode. You can  
also use this mode when you wish to add certain effects to your recordings, such as blurring the background  
during panning shots or recording a moving subject with an afterimage trail.  
60  
• Image quality may not be as good as when using faster shutter speeds in brighter surroundings.  
NOTES  
• When recording under artificial light sources such as fluorescent, mercury or halogen lamps, the screen may  
flicker depending on the shutter speed. To avoid the flicker, set the shutter speed mode to [Speed] and set the  
shutter speed to 1/50* or 1/100 (or an equivalent shutter speed in angle mode).  
* May not be available depending on the frame rate.  
• Closing down the aperture when recording under bright conditions may cause the picture to appear soft or out  
of focus. To avoid the loss of sharpness due to diffraction, use a faster shutter speed, a denser ND filter  
(A 63) or open up the aperture.  
• When the shutter speed mode is set to [Slow], bright red, green or blue dots may appear on the screen. In  
such case, use a faster shutter speed or select a lower ISO speed or gain value (A 61).  
• Even when using the [C9: EOS Std.] preset custom picture file, if you set the camcorder to a certain shutter  
speed, you may not get the exactly the same image brightness as you would on an EOS digital SLR camera  
set to the same shutter speed.  
ISO Speed/Gain  
ISO Speed/Gain  
Depending on the shooting conditions you may want to adjust the brightness of the image. You can do so by  
changing the ISO speed or gain value to adjust the sensitivity of the sensor.  
61  
Operating modes:  
Available ISO speed and gain settings  
1-stop increments  
320*, 400, 800, <850>**, 1600, 3200, 6400, 12800, 20000*  
ISO Speed  
Gain  
320, 400, 500, 640, 800, <850>**, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6400,  
8000, 10000, 12800, 16000, 20000  
1/3-stop increments  
Normal  
Fine  
-6 dB, -3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB, 21 dB, 24 dB, 30 dB  
0 dB to 24 dB in 0.5 dB increments  
* The minimum and maximum ISO speeds are available even when the 1-stop increment scale is selected.  
**ISO speed required for a suitable dynamic range for Canon Log gamma. Equivalent to a gain value of 2.5 dB.  
Changing the ISO Speed or Gain Value  
[~ Camera Setup]  
1 Open the ISO Speed/Gain [Select] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [ISO/Gain] > [Select]  
[ISO/Gain]  
[Select]  
[ISO]  
2 Select [ISO] or [Gain] and then press SET.  
If you selected [ISO] (the default value):  
3 Open the [ISO Increment] submeu to selcrement to  
use when adjusting the ISO spe.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [ISO/Gain] > [ISO crement]  
4 Select [1 stop] or [1/3 stop] and then press SET.  
5 Adjust the ISO speed using the direct setting mode.  
• Repeatedly press the FUNC. button to highlight the ISO speed  
display, select the desired value and then press SET. For details refer  
to Using the Direct Setting Mode (A 57).  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[ISO/Gain]  
[ISO Increment]  
[1/3 stop]  
If you selected [Gain]:  
3 Open the [Gain] submenu to select the increment to use when  
adjusting the gain.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [ISO/Gain] > [Gain]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[ISO/Gain]  
[Gain]  
4 Select [Normal] (3-dB increment) or [Fine] (0.5-dB increment) and  
then press SET.  
5 Adjust the gain using the direct setting mode.  
• Repeatedly press the FUNC. button to highlight the gain display,  
select the desired value and then press SET. For details refer to Using  
the Direct Setting Mode (A 57).  
[Normal]  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [FUNC. ISO/Gain] (A 99), you can press the button to enter the direct  
setting mode with the ISO speed/gain highlighted and ready to be adjusted.  
       
ISO Speed/Gain  
Using the Control Dial  
You can adjust the value of the ISO speed or gain using the control dial on  
the camcorder or that on the grip unit.  
You will need to set the control dials function to [ISO/Gain] in advance.  
62  
Assigning ISO Speed/Gain Control to the Control Dial  
1 Open the [Control Dial] submenu.  
Control dial  
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Control Dial]  
2 Select [ISO/Gain] and then press SET.  
Changing the ISO Speed or Gain Value  
To select whether to change the ISO speed or the gain, perform steps 1 to 4  
in the previous procedure. Turn the control dial to set the desired ISO speed  
or gain value.  
[w Other Functions]  
[Custom Function]  
[Control Dial]  
NOTES  
You can use the [  
or [Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.] setting (  
w
Other Functions]  
>
[Custom Function]  
>
[Control Dial Dir.]  
A
110) to change the direction of the adjustment  
when you turn the control dial on the camcorder or on the grip unit, resptively.  
# [Iris], $ [Off]  
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remo
After completing the necessary preparations (A an djust the ISO speed/gain remotely from a Wi-Fi-  
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remotapplicatio
1 To change the gain value, press [IS] and hen [Gain] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.  
2 Press the current ISO speed or gain value and select the desired value from the list.  
You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.  
• The selected value will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camcorder.  
NOTES  
• When high ISO speeds or gain levels are set, the picture may flicker slightly. ISO 12800 / 30 dB gain and higher  
values in particular, allow you to shoot video with a higher sensitivity but are more prone to the appearance of noise.  
• When high ISO speeds or gain levels are set, bright red, green or blue dots may appear on the screen. In such  
case, use a faster shutter speed (A 58) or select a lower ISO speed or gain value.  
• When the ISO speed or gain level is changed, some noise may appear momentarily on the screen. Do not  
adjust the ISO speed/gain level while recording.  
     
ND Filter  
ND Filter  
Using the ND filters allows you keep the aperture within an appropriate  
range when recording in bright surroundings*.  
* Closing down the aperture when recording under bright conditions may cause the  
picture to appear soft or out of focus. To avoid the loss of sharpness due to diffraction,  
use a denser ND filter or a faster shutter speed (A 58).  
63  
Operating modes:  
Using the ND Filter  
Press the ND FILTER + or - button to select the desired ND filter setting.  
• Repeatedly pressing ND FILTER + button will change the ND filter setting in the following order: [ND1 2 stops]  
[ND2 4 stops] [ND3 6 stops] ND filter off. (The ND FILTER - button cycles through the settings in  
reverse order.)  
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 47) you djust tND filter  
remotely from a Wi-Fi-enabled device using the Wi-Fi Repplicatio.  
Press [ND +] or [ND -] on the Wi-Fi Remote
• The function is identical to that of the ND FIL- butons on the  
camcorder.  
• The selected ND filter setting will be splayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and  
will be applied on the camcorder.  
NOTES  
• Depending on the scene, the color may change when turning the ND filter on/off. Setting a custom white  
balance (A 66) may be effective in such case.  
       
# Adjusting the Aperture  
# Adjusting the Aperture  
You can affect the brightness of your recordings or change the depth of field by adjusting the aperture. For  
example, use a small aperture value for a shallow depth of field that isolates the subject in focus and nicely blurs  
the background. Available aperture values will vary depending on the EF lens attached to the camcorder.  
64  
Operating modes:  
Using the Control Dial  
You can adjust the aperture value of an EF lens using the control dial on the  
camcorder or that on the grip unit.  
By default the control dials function is set to aperture control. If it has been  
changed, follow the procedure below to set the control dials function to  
[Iris] in advance.  
Control dial  
Assigning Aperture Control to the Control Dial  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Control Dial] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > Dia
[Custom Function]  
2 Select [Iris] and then press SET.  
[Control Dial]  
Selecting the Increment Scale to se When Adjusting the  
Aperture  
[Iris]  
1 Open the [Iris Increment] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Iris] > [Iris Increment]  
2 Select [1/2 stop], [1/3 stop] or [Fine] and then press SET.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Iris]  
Changing the Aperture Value  
Turn the control dial to adjust the aperture.  
• The selected aperture value will appear on the lower left of the screen.  
[Iris Increment]  
[1/3 stop]  
• When [~ Camera Setup] > [Iris] > [Iris Increment] is set to [Fine], the  
actual increments will be smaller than 1/3 stop but the onscreen display  
will show the closest 1/3-stop aperture value.  
NOTES  
You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Control Dial Dir.] or [Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.] setting  
(A 110) to change the direction of the adjustment when you turn the control dial on the camcorder or on the  
grip unit, respectively.  
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 47) you can adjust the aperture value remotely from a Wi-Fi-  
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.  
         
# Adjusting the Aperture  
1 Press the current aperture value on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.  
2 Select the desired aperture value from the list.  
You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.  
• Alternatively, you can press IRIS [+] to open the aperture or IRIS [-] to close the aperture in 1/8-stop  
increments. (Onscreen displays will show the closest 1/3-stop aperture value.)  
65  
• The selected value will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the lens.  
NOTES  
• If you are using an EF lens that can correct the aperturaccordig to the position of the zoom, you can  
use the [~ Camera Setup] > [Iris] > [Zooorre] setting to activate this correction.  
White Balance  
White Balance  
The camcorder uses an electronic white balance process to calibrate the picture and ensure accurate colors  
under different lighting conditions. There are 3 methods of setting the white balance.  
66  
Custom white balance: You can use a white object to establish the white balance and set it to one of two custom  
white balance positions, ÅA or ÅB.  
Set color temperature: Allows you to set the color temperature between 2,000 K and 15,000 K.  
Preset white balance: Set the white balance to ¼ (daylight, 5,400 K) or  
(incandescent lamp, 3,200 K). Preset  
white balance settings can be further fine-tuned within a range of -9 to 9.  
When recording under fluorescent lights, we recommend setting the custom white balance.  
Operating modes:  
NOTES  
• The [Color Matrix] and [White Balance] custom picture settings (A 107) take precedence over the white  
balance settings.  
You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Shockless WB] setting (A 110) to make the  
transition look smoother when you change the white balance settin.  
Setting the White Balance  
1 Set the white balance mode using he diremode.  
• Press the FUNC. button to highligthe white bce icon and select  
the desired white balance mode.  
To apply the setting as it is, press SET. establish the custom white  
balance, fine-tune the preset white balance settings or change the  
color temperature, continue the procedure as described below before  
pressing SET.  
• For details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode (A 57).  
If you selected one of the custom white balance settings ÅA or ÅB:  
If a custom white balance has not yet been stored, the custom white  
balance icon ÅA or ÅB and default value (5,500 K) will flash slowly.  
To establish the custom white balance:  
2 Point the camcorder at a white object so that it fills the whole screen.  
• Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use when recording.  
3 Press the Å button.  
• The Å A or Å B icon will flash quickly.  
• Make sure the white object fills the screen until the procedure is completed.  
• After the icon stops flashing, the procedure is completed and the camcorder will exit the direct setting  
mode. The setting is retained even if you turn off the camcorder.  
If you selected one of the preset white balance settings, ¼ or  
:
You can fine-tune the preset values within a range of -9 to 9.  
2 Press the Å button.  
On the screen: The adjustment value 0 will appear next to the white balance icon, highlighted in orange.  
On the rear panel: The adjustment value 0 will appear.  
         
White Balance  
3 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to change the adjustment value and then press SET.  
• The selected adjustment value will be set and the camcorder will exit the direct setting mode.  
On the screen: The selected adjustment value will appear next to the white balance icon.  
On the rear panel: The adjustment value display will disappear and the display will return to normal (all displays  
67  
will reappear). The white balance fine-tuning icon  
will appear to indicate that an adjustment has been made.  
If you selected the color temperature setting,  
:
You can set the color temperature between 2,000 K and 15,000 K in 100 K increments.  
2 Press the Å button.  
On the screen: The default color temperature value (5,500 K) will be highlighted in orange.  
On the rear panel: The default color temperature value will appear.  
3 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to change the color temperature value and then  
press SET.  
• The selected color temperature will be set and the camcorder will exit the direct setting mode.  
On the screen: The selected color temperature will appear next to the white balance icon.  
On the rear panel: The color temperature value will disappear and the display will return to normal (all  
displays will reappear).  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [FUNC. WB] (A 99), you caprs the button to enter the direct setting  
mode with the white balance icon highlighted and reade adjued.  
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Rem
After completing the necessary prepations (A 47u can adjust the white balance remotely from a Wi-Fi-  
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote pplicon.  
1 Press [ÅA] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.  
2 Select the desired white balance mode.  
If you selected ¼,  
or  
:
3 Press the adjustment value [  
desired value from the list.  
0] (¼, ) or color temperature [5500K] ( ) and then select the  
You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.  
   
White Balance  
• The selected value will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camcorder.  
68  
White balance fine-tuning  
Color temperature  
If you selected ÅA or ÅB:  
3 Point the camcorder at a white object so that it fills the whole screen.  
• Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use when recording.  
• Make sure the white object fills the screen until the procedure is cmpleted.  
4 Press [Å].  
• If a custom white balance has not yet been stored, [Åflash wly.  
• During the procedure, [Å] will flash quickly. When it sshing, e procedure is completed and the  
setting will be applied on the camcorder.  
NOTES  
• Using the custom white balance setting:  
- Readjust the custom white balance if you turn the ND filter on/off or when the light source has changed.  
- Very rarely and depending on the light source, Å may keep flashing (it will change to a slow flashing). You  
can still use the setting even in such case.  
Adjusting the Focus  
Adjusting the Focus  
The camcorder does not have automatic focus control and focusing is done manually using the focus ring on the  
attached lens. Nevertheless, the camcorder offers focus assistance functions to help you adjust the focus more  
accurately.  
69  
# only: You can adjust the focus of an attached EF lens remotely using the Wi-Fi Remote application.  
Operating modes:  
Adjusting the Focus Manually  
Turn the focus ring on the attached lens to adjust the focus.  
1 If the attached lens is equipped with an automatic focus function, set the lens to manual focus mode  
in advance.  
• Refer to the instruction manual of the lens used.  
2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.  
NOTES  
# On some EF lenses the focus ring will be disabled when thcus mode switch is set to AF. Be sure to  
set the focus mode switch to MF in advance.  
# Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi e  
After completing the necessary preparions (A 47) you can adjust the focus remotely from a Wi-Fi-enabled  
device using the Wi-Fi Remote applicati.  
1 Set the focus mode switch on the EF lens to AF (autofocus) mode.  
2 Press the one of focus controls to adjust the focus as necessary.  
• Press one of the controls on the [NEAR] side to focus closer or one of the controls on the [FAR] side to focus  
farther away.  
• There are three levels of adjustment - [ ]/[ ] is the smallest and [ ]/[ ] the largest.  
       
Adjusting the Focus  
NOTES  
• If the focus mode switch on the EF lens is set to MF, you will not be able control the focus through remote  
operation. Depending on the lens used, remote operation may not work correctly.  
• If you focus manually and then leave the camcorder with the power turned on, the focus on the subject may  
be lost after a while. This possible slight shift in focus is a result of the internal temperature rising in the  
camcorder and lens. Check the focus before resuming shooting.  
70  
Using the Focus Assistance Functions  
In order to focus more accurately, you can use two focus assistance functions – peaking, which creates a clearer  
contrast by emphasizing the outlines of the subject, and magnification, which enlarges the image on the screen.  
You can use both functions simultaneously for greater effect.  
You can also use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [F. Assist. B&W] setting (A 110) to switch  
the screen to black & white while using the focus assistance functions.  
Peaking  
[£ LCD/VF Setup]  
The camcorder offers two peaking levels. Select the level before activating  
peaking.  
[Select]  
(under [Peaking])  
1 Open the [Select] submenu (under [Peaking]) to select the peakng lel.  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Select] (under [Peaking])  
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.  
[Peaking 1]  
3 Press the PEAKING button.  
• The peaking icon (J or K) appears acener of the  
screen and the outlines in the imawill be ed.  
• Press the button again to turn off paking.  
• Alternatively, you can use the [£ LD/VF etup] > [Peaking]  
setting to turn peaking on and off.  
Magnification  
Press the MAGN. button.  
^ appears at the lower center of the screen and the center of the  
screen is magnified approximately 2 times*.  
• Press the button again to cancel the magnification.  
* The magnification that appears on the LCD screen and on the viewfinder screen is different. The magnification also differs based  
on the video configuration.  
NOTES  
• Peaking/Magnification appears only on the camcorder screen. It will not appear on an external monitor  
connected to the camcorder.  
• Peaking/Magnification will not affect your recordings.  
You can use the [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Peaking 1] and [Peaking 2] settings to set the color, gain and  
frequency of the two peaking levels independently of each other.  
• The camcorder features professional video scopes (A 88). You can display the edge monitor to help you  
focus even more accurately.  
• You can use peaking together with the edge monitor. In such case, The gain and frequency of the peaking  
effect will be adjusted automatically according to the gain settings of the edge monitor.  
         
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns  
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns  
Using onscreen markers allows you to make sure your subject is correctly framed and is within the appropriate  
safe area. The zebra patterns help you identify areas that are overexposed. The onscreen markers and zebra  
pattern will not affect your recordings.  
71  
Operating modes:  
Displaying Onscreen Markers  
[£ LCD/VF Setup]  
The camcorder offers 5 types of onscreen markers. You can display  
multiple onscreen markers simultaneously.  
[Markers]  
1 Open the [Markers] submenu.  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Markers]  
[Center]  
[Horizontal]  
[Grid]  
[Safety Zone]  
[Aspect Marker]  
2 Select a marker you wish to display, select [White] or [Gray] and  
then press SET.  
• Select [Off] to turn off the selected marker.  
• You can display multiple markers simultaneously. Repeat thsteas  
necessary.  
[Off]  
• If you selected [Safety Zone] or [Aspect Marker], costep
Otherwise, you can skip to step 4.  
3 Select [Safety Zone Area] or [Aspect Ratthdesired option and then press SET.  
4 Select [Enable], select [On] and ten press enable the onscreen markers.  
• All of the selected onscreen marks will be displayed.  
• Select [Off] to turn off all onscreen arker
Options  
[Center]:  
Displays a small marker that indicates the center of the screen.  
[Horizontal]:  
[Grid]:  
Displays a horizontal line to help you compose level shots.  
Displays a grid that allows you to frame your shots correctly (horizontally and vertically).  
Displays indicators that show various safe areas, such as the action safe area and text safe area.  
Available options for [Safety Zone Area] are [95%], [92.5%], [90%] and [80%].  
[Safety Zone]:  
[Aspect Marker]: Displays markers that indicate various aspect ratios to help you keep your shot within that area.  
Available options for [Aspect Ratio] are [2.35:1], [1.85:1], [1.75:1], [1.66:1], [14:9], [13:9] and [4:3].  
Safety zone 80%  
Level marker  
Aspect guide 4:3  
     
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns  
Grid  
72  
Center marker  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [Markers] (A 99), you can press the button to turn the onscreen markers on  
and off.  
Displaying Zebra Patterns  
[£ LCD/VF Setup]  
The camcorder has a zebra pattern feature that shows black and white  
diagonal stripes over areas that are overexposed. This is displayed only  
on the screen and will not affect your recordings. There are two types f  
zebra patterns and you can display both simultaneously. Zebra 1 ts u  
[Select]  
(under [Zebra])  
identify areas within a certain range ( 5% of a specified levehile za  
[Zebra 1]  
2 lets you identify areas that are over a specified level. Wdispla
both simultaneously and they overlap, only zebra 1 ill be yed in  
those areas.  
1 Open the zebra pattern [Select] sbmenu.  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Select] (und[Zebra])  
2 Select [Zebra 1], [Zebra 2] or [Zebra &2] nd then press SET.  
3 Open the zebra level submenu.  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Zebra 1 Level] or [Zebra 2 Level]  
4 Select a zebra level and then press SET.  
5 Press the ZEBRA button to activate the selected zebra pattern.  
• Alternatively, before closing the menu, you can also select [Zebra],  
select [On] and then press SET.  
NOTES  
You can use the [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [HD Output] setting to display the zebra pattern on an external  
monitor connected to the HD/SD SDI terminal (HD output only), SYNC OUT terminal (HD-Y signal output only)  
or HDMI OUT terminal (HD output only).  
   
Setting the Time Code  
Setting the Time Code  
The camcorder can generate a time code signal and embed it in your recordings. You can have the camcorder  
output the time code signal from the HD/SD SDI terminal or TIME CODE terminal (A 79). In addition, you can  
superimpose the time code on video output from the HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal. For NTSC  
recordings, you can also select between a drop frame and non-drop frame time code.  
To synchronize the camcorders time code to an external time code generator, refer to Synchronizing with an  
External Device (A 77).  
73  
Operating modes:  
Selecting the Running Mode  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
You can select the running mode of the camcorders time code.  
[Time Code]  
1 Open the time code [Mode] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [Mode]  
[Mode]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Regen.], you do not need to perform the rest of s  
procedure. If you selected [Preset] and would like to set the ti
[Regen.]  
codes initial value, see the following section Setting e Cods  
Initial Value.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
3 After you select [Preset], open the time cn] sbmenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code> [Ru
[Time Code]  
4 Select the desired option and thn press SE
[Run]  
Options  
[Preset]: The time code starts from an initial value you can select in  
advance. The default initial time code is 00:00:00.00. The time  
codes running mode depends on the [Run] setting.  
[Rec Run]: The time code runs only while recording so clips  
recorded consecutively on the same CF card will have  
continuous time codes.  
[Rec Run]  
[Free Run]:The time code starts running the moment you press  
SET to select this option and keeps running regardless  
of the camcorders operation.  
[Regen.]: The camcorder will read the selected CF card and the time code  
will continue from the last recorded time code on the CF card. The  
time code runs only while recording so clips recorded  
consecutively on the same CF card will have continuous time  
codes.  
Setting the Time Code’s Initial Value  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
[Time Code]  
If you set the time code mode to [Preset], you can set the initial value of  
the time code.  
1 Open the time code [Setting] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [Setting]  
2 Select [Set] and then press SET.  
[Setting]  
         
Setting the Time Code  
• The time code setting screen appears with an orange selection frame indicating the hours.  
To reset the time code to [00:00:00.00], select [Reset] instead. If the running mode is set to [Free Run], the  
time code will be reset the moment you press SET and keep running continuously from 00:00:00.00.  
3 Use the joystick (Ý) or SELECT dial to set the hours and press SET to move to the minutes.  
4 Change the rest of the fields (minutes, seconds, frame) in the same way.  
• Press the CANCEL button to close the screen without setting the time code.  
5 Select [Set] to close the screen.  
74  
• If the running mode is set to [Free Run], the time code will start running from the selected time code the  
moment you press SET.  
Selecting Drop or Non-Drop Frame  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
When [w Other Functions] > [NTSC/PAL] is set to [NTSC], you can  
select between a drop frame (DF) or non-drop frame (NDF) time code,  
depending on how you plan to use your recordings.  
[Time Code]  
In the following cases, the time code is set to non-drop frame (NDF) and  
cannot be changed.  
- [w Other Functions] > [NTSC/PAL] is set to [PAL]  
- [w Other Functions] > [24.00P] is set to [On]  
- [w Other Functions] > [NTSC/PAL] is set to [NTSC] and the frae e  
is set to 23.98P  
[DF/NDF]  
[DF]  
1 Open the [DF/NDF] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [DF/
2 Select [DF] or [NDF] and then preSET.  
• The time code display will differ deending on thetting. When you select [DF], the time code will appear  
as [00:00:00.00]; when you select [DF], it ill appear as [00:00:00:00].  
Putting the Time Code Display on Hold  
If you set an assignable button to [Time Code Hold] (A 99), you can press the button to freeze the display of  
the time code*. While the time code display is put on hold, [H] will appear on the screen next to the time code  
and [HOLD] will appear on the rear panel.  
The time code continues to run normally while the time code display is on hold. When you resume the time code  
display, the current time code will be displayed.  
* The time code signal output from the HD/SD SDI terminal or TIME CODE terminal will not be put on hold. The time code  
superimposed on the video signal output from the other terminals will be put on hold.  
About the Time Code Display  
An icon may appear next to the time code depending on the operation. Refer to the following table.  
Icon  
R
Description  
The time code is set to [Regen.].  
P
The time code is set to [Preset] and the running mode is set to [Rec Run].  
The time code is set to [Preset] and the running mode is set to [Free Run].  
Time code signal is coming from an external source.  
Time code display is on hold.  
F
E
H
No icon Time code during clip playback.  
       
Setting the Time Code  
NOTES  
• When [w Other Functions] > [24.00P] is set to [On] or [w Other Functions] > [Frame Rate] is set to  
[23.98P], the frames value in the time code runs from 0 to 23. When [Frame Rate] is set to [25.00P], [50.00i] or  
[50.00P], it runs from 0 to 24. For other [Frame Rate] settings, it runs from 0 to 29.  
75  
• When you are using interval recording, frame recording or slow & fast motion recording mode, you cannot  
select the [Free Run] running mode. Conversely, when you are using pre-recording mode, [Free Run] is set  
automatically and cannot be changed.  
• When you mix drop frame and non-drop frame time codes, there might be a discontinuity in the time code at  
the point where the recording starts.  
• As long as the built-in rechargeable lithium battery is charged and you selected the [Free Run] running mode,  
the time code continues to run even if you disconnect all other power sources. However, this is less accurate  
than when the camcorder is on.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Time Code] (A 99), you can press the button to open the [¤ TC/UB  
Setup] > [Time Code] submenu.  
Setting the User Bit  
Setting the User Bit  
The user bit display can be selected from the date or the time of  
recording, or an identification code consisting of 8 characters in the  
hexadecimal system. There are sixteen possible characters: the numbers  
0 to 9 and the letters A to F.  
If user bit information is being received along with an external time code,  
you can also record the external user bit on the recording media.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
[User Bit]  
76  
[Type]  
Operating modes:  
[Setting]  
1 Open the user bit [Type] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [User Bit] > [Type]  
2 Select the desired user bit type and press SET.  
• Select [Setting] to set your own identification code, [Time] to use the time as user bit, or [Date] to use the  
date as the user bit.  
• If you selected [Time] or [Date], you do not need to perform the rest of the procedure. If you selected  
[Setting], continue the procedure to set the identification code.  
3 Select [Set] and then press SET.  
• The user bit setting screen appears with an orange selection ramon the leftmost digit.  
To reset the user bit to [00 00 00 00], select [Reset] insd.  
4 Use the joystick (Ý) or SELECT dial to select the aracteand press SET to move to the next  
digit.  
• Change the rest of the digits in the same w
• Press the CANCEL button to close he screesetting the user bit.  
5 Select [Set] to close the screen.  
   
Synchronizing with an External Device  
Synchronizing with an External Device  
Using genlock synchronization, you can synchronize this camcorders video signal to that of an external video  
device. Similarly, using an external time code signal, you can synchronize this camcorders time code to the  
external signal. Using the external time code signal with multiple cameras allows you to set up a multi-camera  
recording. You can also output the time code signal from this camcorder to achieve the same result. If you  
output the time code from the HD/SD SDI terminal to an editing device, the editor can create video with the  
same time code.  
77  
Connecting an External Device  
When synchronizing the camcorder to an external signal, input a reference video signal* through the GENLOCK  
terminal or output the camcorders signal as a reference signal for an external device through the SYNC OUT  
terminal.  
When synchronizing a time code signal, use the TIME CODE terminal. Be sure to set the TIME CODE terminal to  
input or output in advance.  
Connect the external device to the camcorder as shown in the following diagram.  
* For the reference video signal, you can use an analog blackburst or tri-level signal.  
Connection Diagram  
GENLOCK terminal  
SYNC OUT terminal  
TIME CODE terminal  
GENLOCK  
Time code  
synchronization  
synchronization  
Reference Video Signal Input (Genlock Synchronization)  
When a reference sync signal (analog blackburst or tri-level signal) is input through the GENLOCK terminal, the  
phases of the camcorders V and H sync will automatically be synchronized to it. The phase difference between  
the external Genlock signal and the camcorder is initially set to 0. The H phase can be adjusted within the range  
of approximately 0.4 H (HD equivalent).  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Genlock Adjust.] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Genlock Adjust.]  
[w Other Functions]  
2 Adjust the phase to the desired level, select [Set] and then press  
SET.  
[Genlock Adjust.]  
• Use the joystick (Ý) or SELECT dial to select the value for each field  
and press SET to move to the next field.  
           
Synchronizing with an External Device  
Time Code Signal Input  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
[Time Code]  
[TC In/Out]  
[In]  
An external SMPTE-standard LTC timing signal received from the TIME  
CODE terminal will be recorded as the time code. The user bit of the  
external timing signal can also be recorded. Before connecting the device,  
set the TIME CODE terminal to input. Also, you must set the running  
mode of the time code to [Free Run] (A 73).  
78  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [TC In/Out] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [TC In/Out]  
2 Select [In] and then press SET.  
Recording the User Bit of an External Signal  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
[User Bit]  
The user bit of an external time code signal can also be recorded with the  
time code itself.  
1 Open the user bit [Rec Mode] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [User Bit] > [Rec Mode]  
2 Select [External] and then press SET.  
[Rec Mode]  
[Internal]  
NOTES  
• The Genlock signal synchronization stabilizes roxiately 10 seconds. When the camcorder locks on  
an external Genlock signal, U will appear oer rigt of the screen.  
• If the external Genlock signal is incoect or therput signal, the external time code that is recorded  
may be incorrect.  
• While a time code signal is being receivd, thexternal time codes drop-frame bit will be used (if the external  
time code is non-drop frame, [NDF] will appear on the rear panel).  
• When an external time code signal is received, the camcorders own time code will be synchronized to it and  
the synchronization will be maintained even if you disconnect the cable from the TIME CODE terminal.  
However, performing any of the following actions while the cable is not connected will cause the  
synchronization to be disrupted; the correct time code will be restored once you reconnect the cable.  
- Turning the camcorder off/on  
- Changing the operating mode to  
- Changing the video configuration  
- Changing the frame rate  
mode  
• If the external time code signal is incorrect or there is no input signal, the internal time code set in the  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] submenu will be recorded instead.  
• When the camcorder locks on an external time code signal, [EXT-LOCK] appears on the rear panel.  
     
Synchronizing with an External Device  
Reference Video Signal Output  
You can output the camcorders video signal as a reference sync signal (analog blackburst or tri-level signal)  
through the SYNC OUT terminal to synchronize an external device to this camcorder.  
79  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [SYNC Output] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [SYNC Output]  
[¢ Video Setup]  
2 Select [HD Sync] (tri-level signal) or [Blk Burst]* (black burst) and  
then press SET.  
* Not available for 24.00P recordings.  
[SYNC Output]  
[Composite]  
Time Code Signal Output  
The time code will be output from the TIME CODE terminal as an SMPTE-standard LTC timing signal. The user  
bit will also be output. Before connecting the device, set [¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [TC In/Out] to  
[Out] to change the TIME CODE terminal to output (A 78). If you set the [¢ Video Setup] > [SDI Output]  
setting to [HD] or [SD], the embedded time code will be output from the HD/SD SDI terminal.  
Operating modes:  
NOTES  
• The user bit of the time code signal is output cacorder is recording in  
mode or during  
playback of a clip in mode. We[w ctions] > [24.00P] is set to [On] or [w Other  
Functions] > [Frame Rate] is set to 23.98P] a¤ TC/UB Setup] > [User Bit] > [Output Mode]  
setting is set to [Pulldown], the user it will be 2:3 pulldown data. In other words, when a 23.98P or 24.00P  
recording is output from the HD/SD Stermal, the signal is converted to 59.94i / 59.94P or 60.00i / 60.00P  
using the 2:3 pulldown method. An external device can receive the data used in this conversion (2:3 pulldown  
data) to convert the signal to the original 1080/23.98P or 1080/24.00P specifications.  
       
Recording Audio  
Recording Audio  
The camcorder features two-channel linear PCM audio recording and playback with a sampling frequency of  
48 kHz. You can record audio using commercially available microphones (XLR terminal, MIC terminal) or line  
input (XLR terminal). You can select the audio input independently for channel 1 and channel 2.  
80  
Operating modes:  
Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Input Source to the Camcorder  
In order to use the XLR terminals, the monitor unit must be attached to the camcorder. The monitor unit features  
two XLR terminals (CH1/CH2) that can be used to record audio independently to the two audio channels.  
In addition to XLR microphones, you can also attach to connect to the camcorders MIC terminal commercially  
available condenser microphones with their own power supply and a 3.5 mm mini-stereo plug*. If the monitor  
unit is attached to the camcorder, you can use the microphone holder on the monitor unit.  
* For PAL recordings, use commercially available microphones with a cable no longer than 3 m.  
Follow the procedure below to attach a microphone (refer also to the following illustration). To connect an  
external device to the camcorder, plug the devices cable into the camcorders XLR terminal ().  
1 Loosen the microphone lock screw (), open the microphe older and insert the microphone ().  
2 Tighten the lock screw and put the microphone cough te microphone cable clamp under  
the microphone holder ().  
3 Plug the microphone cable into the desirermial () or the MIC terminal ().  
XLR terminals  
Cable clamp  
MIC terminal  
Microphone  
lock screw  
       
Recording Audio  
Selecting the Audio Input from the XLR Terminals  
Using the XLR terminals CH1 and CH2, you can record audio independently to the two audio channels from a  
microphone or analog audio input source. Note that the camcorders MIC terminal is given priority over the XLR  
terminals. To record audio from the XLR terminals, be sure not to connect any microphones to the MIC terminal.  
81  
Switching Between Microphone and Line Input  
CH1/CH2  
ã
Set the XLR terminal switch of the desired channel to LINE or MIC.  
switches  
To supply a microphone with phantom power, set the switch to  
MIC+48V instead. Make sure to connect the microphone first, before  
turning the phantom power on. Keep the microphone connected  
when turning off the phantom power.  
XLR  
terminal  
switches  
• When using the XLR terminal to record to only one channel, use the  
CH1 terminal.  
CH1/CH2  
ã
dials  
Selecting the Recording Channel  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
You can select to which channel the camcorderd adio.  
1 Open the [XLR Rec Channel] submu.  
[Audio Input]  
[XLR Rec Channel]  
[CH1]  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [XLR Rec Channel]  
2 Select the desired option and then prs SE
Options  
[CH1]:  
Records audio to each channel separately. Audio input  
into CH1 is recorded to channel 1, while audio input into  
CH2 is recorded to channel 2.  
[CH1/CH2]: Audio input into CH1 is recorded to both channels. Audio  
input into CH2 will not be recorded.  
IMPORTANT  
• When connecting a microphone or device that does not support phantom power, make sure to set the XLR  
terminal switch to MIC or LINE, respectively. If you set the switch to MIC+48V, the microphone or device may  
be damaged.  
     
Recording Audio  
Adjusting the Audio Level from the XLR Terminals  
You can set the audio recording level for audio input from the XLR Terminals to auto or manual for each channel.  
82  
Automatic Audio Level Adjustment  
Set the ã switch of the desired channel to A (automatic) to let  
the camcorder automatically adjust that channels audio level.  
NOTES  
• When both CH1 and CH2 are set to the same audio input (external  
microphone or external line input), if the audio level is set to automatic,  
you can use the [¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [XLR ALC Link]  
setting to link the audio level adjustment of both channels.  
CH1/CH2  
ã
switches  
CH1/CH2  
ã
Manual Audio Level Adjustment  
switches  
You can set the audio level for each channel manually from -G to 18 dB.  
1 Set the ã switch of the desired channel to M.  
2 Turn the corresponding ã dial to adjust the audio lev.  
• For reference, the 0 corresponds to -G, 5 correspon0 dB,  
and 10 corresponds to +18 dB.  
• As a guideline, adjust the audio recording levat taudio level  
meter on the screen or rear panel will go to f th18 dB  
mark only occasionally.  
CH1/CH2  
ã
dials  
• Closing the protective cover for XLaudio contill prevent the  
audio controls from being changed adverntly.  
NOTES  
• If at least one of the channels is set to manual audio level adjustment, you can also activate the audio peak  
limiter to prevent audio distortions. When activated, the audio peak limiter will limit the amplitude of audio input  
signals when they exceed -4 dBFS. Use the [¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [Limiter] setting.  
• We recommend using headphones when adjusting the audio level. If the input level is too high, audio may  
become distorted even if the audio level indicator shows an appropriate level.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Audio Level] (A 99), you can press the button to turn the onscreen audio  
level indicator on and off.  
Adjusting the Microphone’s Sensitivity  
You can adjust the microphones sensitivity if the XLR terminal switch is set to MIC or MIC+48V.  
1 Open the desired XLR terminals sensitivity submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [XLR1 Mic Trimming] or [XLR2 Mic Trimming]  
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.  
               
Recording Audio  
Available Sensitivity Levels  
+12 dB +6 dB 0 dB  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
-6 dB  
-12 dB  
[Audio Input]  
83  
[XLR1 Mic Trimming]  
[XLR2 Mic Trimming]  
[0 dB]  
Activating the Microphone’s Attenuator  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
You can activate the microphones attenuator (20 dB) if the XLR terminal  
switch is set to MIC or MIC+48V.  
[Audio Input]  
1 Open the desired XLR terminals microphone attenuator submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [XLR1 Mic Att.] or [XLR2 Mic  
Att.]  
[XLR1 Mic Att.]  
[XLR2 Mic Att.]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
[Off]  
Adjusting the Audio Level from the MIC Ter
You can adjust the audio recording level of a mattched to the  
MIC terminal to auto or manual. You cast the el manually  
within a range of 0 to 99.  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Input]  
[MIC Mode]  
1 Open the [MIC Mode] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [Mode]  
2 Select [Automatic] or [Manual] and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Automatic], you do not need to perform the rest of the  
procedure. If you selected [Manual], continue the procedure to set the  
microphones audio recording level.  
[Automatic]  
3 Open the [MIC Level] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [MIC Level]  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Input]  
[MIC Level]  
[50]  
4 Use the joystick (Ý) or SELECT dial to set the audio recording  
level and then press SET.  
• As a guideline, adjust the audio recording level so that the audio level  
meter on the screen or rear panel will go to the right of the 18 dB  
mark only occasionally.  
NOTES  
• When adjusting the audio level manually, you can activate the audio peak limiter with the [¡ Audio Setup] >  
[Audio Input] > [Limiter] setting. When activated, the audio peak limiter will limit the amplitude of audio input  
signals when they exceed -4 dBFS.  
• We recommend using headphones when adjusting the audio level. If the input level is too high, audio may  
become distorted even if the audio level indicator shows an appropriate level.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Audio Level] (A 99), you can press the button to turn the onscreen audio  
level indicator on and off.  
       
Recording Audio  
Activating the Microphone’s Attenuator  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Input]  
[MIC Att.]  
If the audio level is too high and the sound sounds distorted, activate the  
microphone attenuator (20 dB).  
84  
1 Open the [MIC Att.] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [MIC Att.]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
[Off]  
Monitoring the Audio with Headphones  
Connect headphones* to the × (headphone) terminal to monitor the  
recorded audio. Press the HEADPHONE +/- buttons to adjust the volume.  
* For PAL recordings, use commercially available headphones with a cable no longer  
than 3 m.  
× (headphone)  
terminal  
NOTES  
You can also adjust the headphone volume with the [¡ Audio Setup]  
> [Audio Output] > [Headphone Volume] setting.  
HEADPHONE +/-  
buttons  
     
Using Metadata  
Using Metadata  
The camcorder automatically adds metadata to clips while they are being recorded. You can use the supplied  
Canon XF Utility software to check and search for specific metadata. You can also create and transfer a user  
memo remotely using the Wi-Fi Remote application (A 47).  
85  
Metadata Components  
Entering content  
Canon XF Utility  
Checking content  
Metadata  
Camcorder  
Wi-Fi Remote  
Canon XF Utility  
1
User Memo: clip title, creator, location and description.  
GPS information: altitude, latitude and longitude.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
2
Ü
3
Recording data: Shutter speed, ISO speed/gain value, etc.  
Unique Material Identifiers (UMID): country, organization  
and user codes based on the SMPTE standard.  
Ü
1
2
3
User memo files need to be created using the software and saved on the SD card in advance.  
GPS information can only be added to clips already recorded.  
Recording data is logged automatically by the camcorder.  
Operating modes:  
Setting a User Memo Created with Canon ity  
Before you can add a user memo, you must firsthe pplied Canon XF Utility software (A 132). Next,  
create the user memo and then save it to an Sce u insert the SD card in the camcorder and select  
the user memo, it will be added to clipyou rec
For details on using the supplied softare, refer to struction manual that is installed with the Canon XF  
Utility software (A 138).  
1 Use Canon XF Utility to save a user memo to an SD card.  
• For details, refer to Managing User Memo Profiles in the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual.  
2 Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the camcorder.  
3 Open the metadata [Setting] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Set Metadata] > [Setting]  
[w Other Functions]  
4 Select [SD Card] and then press SET.  
[Set Metadata]  
[Setting]  
5 Open the [User Memo] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Set Metadata] > [User Memo]  
6 Select the file name of the desired user memo and then press SET.  
• The Q icon appears on the right of the screen.  
[SD Card]  
• Select [Off] to record clips without a user memo.  
[w Other Functions]  
[Set Metadata]  
[User Memo]  
NOTES  
• After you set a user memo, do not remove the SD card while you are  
recording. If the SD card is removed, the user memo will not be added  
to the clip.  
You must set the user memo before you start recording for it to be  
added to the clip. You cannot change the user memo already added to a  
clip using the camcorder but you can do so with the Canon XF Utility  
software.  
       
Using Metadata  
Setting a User Memo Using Wi-Fi Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 47) you create a user memo profile and transfer it to the  
camcorder from a Wi-Fi-enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application. Using the Wi-Fi Remote application  
you have two additional advantages over user memos created with Canon XF Utility: you can change the user  
memo of the last clip recorded, even if you did not specify a user memo in advance; and you can enter manually  
the GPS information of your shooting location.  
86  
1 Press the [Metadata Input] tab on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.  
2 Press [  
Activate].  
• Alternatively, on the camcorder, you can set [w Other Functions] > [Set Metadata] > [Setting] to [Remote].  
3 Fill the necessary user memo and GPS information fields.  
You can press [Clear] to clear the information entered into each field.  
4 Press one of the transfer options to transfer the metadata to the camcorder.  
• [Metadata correctly transferred] will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and the metadata will be  
transferred and applied to the clips on the camcorder.  
5 Press  
to close the message.  
Options  
[Apply from Next]: Adds the metadata you set in Wi-Fi Remote to all cliprecorded after the transfer.  
[Overwrite Prev.]: Only available after recording a clip. Adds the metata ou set in Wi-Fi Remote to all clips recorded  
after the transfer and also to the last clip reed (overiting any user memo that may have been  
recorded previously with the clip).  
[Overwrite]:  
Only available while recording a dds metadata you set in Wi-Fi Remote to the clip that is  
being recorded (overwriting anusememo). It will also add this metadata to all clips  
recorded after the trafer
NOTES  
• The metadata sent to the camcorder from Wi-Fi Remote will be lost in the following cases.  
- If the camcorder was turned off.  
- If the [w Other Functions] > [Set Metadata] > [Setting] setting was changed.  
• Metadata sent to the camcorder from Wi-Fi Remote will not be added to relay clips recorded before the switch  
to the current CF card.  
 
Colors Bars/Audio Reference Signal  
Colors Bars/Audio Reference Signal  
You can have the camcorder generate and record color bars and a 1 kHz audio reference signal and output  
1
2
them from the HD/SD SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal, SYNC OUT terminal and × (headphone) terminal .  
1
Outputs color bars only.  
87  
2
Outputs audio reference signal only.  
Operating modes:  
Recording Color Bars  
[~ Camera Setup]  
You can choose between SMPTE standard-definition color bars, EBU  
color bars and ARIB multi-format HDTV color bars.  
[Color Bars]  
1 Open the color bars [Type] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Color Bars] > [Type]  
[Type]  
2 Select the type of color bars and then press SET.  
[SMPTE]  
3 Open the [Enable] submenu to activate the color bars.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Color Bars] > [Enable]  
4 Select [On] and then press SET.  
• The selected color bars appear on the screen and corde
[~ Camera Setup]  
when you press the START/STOP button.  
[Color Bars]  
Turning the camcorder off or changing the g me to  
mode will deactivate the color bars.  
[Enable]  
• Alternatively, if you set an assignale button Bars] (A 99),  
you can press the button to active the color bars.  
[Off]  
Recording an Audio Reference Signal  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
The camcorder can output a 1 kHz audio reference signal with the color  
bars.  
[Audio Input]  
1 Open the [1 kHz Tone] submenu.  
[1 kHz Tone]  
[Off]  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [1 kHz Tone]  
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.  
• Available levels are -12 dB, -18 dB and -20 dB.  
• Select [Off] to turn off the signal.  
• The signal is output at the selected level and will be recorded when you press the START/STOP button.  
         
Video Scopes  
Video Scopes  
The camcorder can display a simplified waveform monitor or vectorscope. It can also display an edge monitor*  
to help you focus. The video scopes appear only on the LCD screen. They do not appear in the viewfinder or on  
an external monitor. In order to use the video scopes, the monitor unit must be attached to the camcorder.  
* The edge monitor looks at the focus of the entire picture and displays the results as a waveform. The edge monitor is available  
88  
only in  
mode.  
Operating modes:  
Displaying a Video Scope  
Press the WFM button (waveform monitor or vectorscope) or EDGE  
MON. button (edge monitor).  
• The waveform monitor will appear in a window on the lower right of the  
screen.  
You can repeatedly press the WFM button to activate the video scopes  
in the following sequence.  
Waveform monitor Vectorscope Off  
• Alternatively, you can display the video scopes using [w Other  
Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Setting]. Select [WFM] fowavefo
monitor, [VS] for the vectorscope or [Edge Mon.] for the monitor.  
Configuring the Waveform Moitor  
[w Other Functions]  
[WFM (LCD)]  
The camcorders waveform monitor functioffs 5 modes. You can also  
change the gain.  
1 Open the [Waveform Monitor] submenu.  
[Waveform Monitor]  
[Line]  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Waveform Monitor]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform  
steps 3 and 4.  
3 Open the waveform monitor [Gain] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Gain] (under [Waveform Monitor])  
4 Select [1x] or [2x] and then press SET.  
Options  
[Line]:  
Sets the waveform monitor to line display mode.  
[Line+Spot]:  
[Field]:  
The waveform of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the [Line] mode waveform.  
Sets the waveform monitor to field display mode.  
[RGB]:  
Functions like an RGB parade scope.  
[YPbPr]:  
Functions like a YPbPr parade scope.  
         
Video Scopes  
Configuring the Vectorscope  
[w Other Functions]  
The camcorders vectorscope function offers 2 modes. You can also  
change the gain.  
[WFM (LCD)]  
[Vectorscope]  
[Normal]  
89  
1 Open the [Vectorscope] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Vectorscope]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform  
steps 3 and 4.  
3 Open the vectorscope [Gain] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Gain] (under [Vectorscope])  
4 Select [1x] or [5x] and then press SET.  
Options  
[Spot]:  
The color signal of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the [Normal] mode waveform.  
[Normal]: Displays the vectorscope.  
Configuring the Edge Monitor  
[w Other Functions]  
[WFM (LCD)]  
[Edge Monitor]  
[Type 1]  
Using this video scope allows you to focus with more prYou ca
use the edge monitor along with the other focus stancctions  
(A 70). The edge monitor features 2 modes.  
1 Open the [Edge Monitor] submenu
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD> [Edge Monitor]  
2 Select the desired option and then resSET.  
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform  
steps 3 and 4.  
3 Open the edge monitor [Gain] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Gain] (under [Edge Monitor])  
4 Select the desired gain value and then press SET.  
Options  
[Type 1]: The waveform that represents the focus of the entire picture is displayed in green. In addition, the waveform  
of the area in the three red frames is displayed in red on top of the previous waveform.  
[Type 2]: This mode displays the edge monitor with the waveform monitor in [Line+Spot] mode. The waveform  
monitor appears on the left in green while the edge monitor appears on the right in blue. The waveform of  
the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the edge monitor waveform.  
       
Adding Marks while Recording  
Adding Marks while Recording  
When recording, you can flag an important shot in a clip by adding a “shot mark” (!). There are two types of  
shot marks, shot mark 1 (") and shot mark 2 (#), and you can add either or both types to a single clip. You can  
also add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to the entire clip to flag clips you want to set apart. You can add all  
four types of marks remotely using the Wi-Fi Remote application.  
90  
When the camcorder is in  
mode, you can add or delete shot marks (A 124). You can also display an  
index screen of all the shot marks (A 123), allowing you to find a particular scene in a clip more quickly.  
Operating modes:  
Adding Shot Marks while Recording  
To add a shot mark to a clip while recording, you must first set in advance an assignable button to [Add Shot  
Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2].  
1 Set an assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] (A 99).  
To add both shot marks, set one assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] and another assignable button to  
[Add Shot Mark 2].  
2 While you are recording, press the assignable button at thbinning of the shot you wish to mark.  
• A message indicating the short mark will appear and ected ot mark will be added to the current  
frame of the clip.  
You can press the button again to add anotmaUp to 100 shot marks (" and # marks  
combined) can be added to a single clip.  
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Rmote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 47) you can set a shot mark (" or #) remotely from a Wi-Fi-  
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.  
1 While recording a clip, press [SHOT MARK1] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen to set a shot mark 1 or  
[SHOT MARK2] to set a shot mark 2.  
• [Shot Mark1] or [Shot Mark2] will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and the shot mark will be applied  
to the clip.  
2 Press  
to close the message.  
         
Adding Marks while Recording  
NOTES  
• There may be up to a 0.5 second delay from when you press the button to when the camcorder adds the shot  
mark. When using the Wi-Fi Remote application, the delay may be longer depending on the conditions of the  
wireless signal.  
91  
• When you are using interval recording or frame recording mode, you cannot add shot marks to a clip.  
• When a clip contains either shot mark, ! will appear next to the clips thumbnail in the playback index screen.  
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark to the Last Clip Recorded  
After recording an important clip, you can add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to the clip to flag it and set it  
apart. When the camcorder is in  
mode, you can display an index screen that contains only clips with an  
$ mark or only clips with a % mark (A 114). Furthermore, you can use the $ mark to protect important clips,  
as clips with an $ mark cannot be deleted.  
To add an $ mark or % mark to the last clip recorded in  
mode, you must first set in advance an  
assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark].  
1 Set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 99).  
To add both types of clip marks (to different clips), set one assignable button to [Add $ Mark] and another  
assignable button to [Add % Mark].  
2 After recording a clip, press the assignable button.  
• A message indicating the clip mark will appear and cted clmark will be added to the clip.  
Remote Operation Using Wi-i Remot
After completing the necessary preparons (A 47) you can set an $ mark or a % mark remotely from a Wi-  
Fi-enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote pication.  
1 After recording a clip, press [$ MARK] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen to set a an $ mark or  
[% MARK] to set a % mark.  
• [OK Mark] or [Check Mark] will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and the mark will be applied to the  
clip.  
2 Press  
to close the message.  
NOTES  
• A clip cannot have both an $ mark and a % mark at the same time.  
     
Reviewing a Recording  
Reviewing a Recording  
When the camcorder is in  
was recorded.  
mode, you can review the last clip that  
[w Other Functions]  
[Rec Review]  
92  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Rec Review] submenu to set the review length.  
[Entire Clip]  
[w Other Functions] > [Rec Review]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
3 After you finish recording, press the u button.  
• The last clip that was recorded is played back without audio for the  
selected duration. [Ð REVIEW] appears at the top of the screen.  
• Press the CANCEL button to stop reviewing the clip and change the  
camcorder back to record pause mode.  
• After the clip finishes playing back, the camcorder returns to record  
pause mode.  
Options  
[Entire Clip]: Allows you to review the entire clip.  
[Last 4 sec]: Allows you to review just the last 4 seconds of the clip.  
NOTES  
• When you are using a special recording mode you annot review a clip.  
• If the camcorder switched CF cards uring a rehe camcorder will play back the clip on the CF card  
most recently recorded on.  
   
Special Recording Modes  
Special Recording Modes  
The camcorder features 4 special recording modes.  
Interval recording ([Interval Rec]): The camcorder will automatically record a pre-defined number of frames at a pre-  
defined interval. This mode is suitable for recording subjects with little movement, such as natural surroundings or plants.  
93  
Frame recording ([Frame Rec]): The camcorder will record a pre-defined number of frames every time you press  
the START/STOP button. This mode is suitable for recording stop motion animation.  
Slow & fast motion recording ([Slow & Fast Motion]): This mode allows you to change the shooting frame rate to  
achieve a slow motion or fast motion effect during playback.  
Pre-recording ([Pre Rec]): The camcorder will start recording approximately 3 seconds before you press the  
START/STOP button. This is especially useful when it is difficult to predict when to start recording.  
Operating modes:  
Interval Recording Mode  
[w Other Functions]  
Set the interval and number of frames in advance. Sound is not recoed  
in this mode.  
[Interval Rec]  
Configuring Interval Recording Mode  
[Interval]  
1 Open the [Interval] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Interval Rec] > [Int
[1 sec]  
2 Select the desired interval and then resSE
• See the following table for the avable interva
3 Select [Rec Frames], select the desirenumer of frames and then  
press SET.  
[w Other Functions]  
• Available options depend on the frame rate used: 1, 3, 6 and 9  
[Interval Rec]  
frames (when [w Other Functions] > [24.00P] is set to [On] or  
[Frame Rate] is set to [23.98P], [29.97P] or [59.94i]) or 2, 6 and 12  
frames (when [w Other Functions] > [Frame Rate] is set to [25.00P],  
[50.00i], [50.00P] or [59.94P]).  
[Rec Frames]  
[1]  
Available Intervals  
1 sec  
10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 50 sec  
4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 9 min  
2 sec  
3 sec  
4 sec  
5 sec  
6 sec  
7 sec  
1 min  
8 sec  
2 min  
9 sec  
3 min  
10 min  
Activating Interval Recording Mode and Recording  
[w Other Functions]  
[Special Rec]  
[Off]  
1 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Rec]  
2 Select [Interval Rec] and then press SET.  
• [INT STBY] appears at the top of the screen (with [INT] flashing).  
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• The camcorder automatically records the set number of frames at the set interval.  
• The tally lamp illuminates.  
• [INT STBY] changes to [Ü INT REC] while recording frames and [Ü INT STBY] while between intervals.  
         
Special Recording Modes  
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.  
• All of the recorded frames are joined together into one clip.  
• The tally lamps go out and [INT STBY] appears at the top of the screen (with [INT] flashing).  
94  
NOTES  
You can use only one special recording mode at a time.  
• While recording, you cannot change the interval or number of frames.  
• Some frames at the point the recording was stopped may be recorded and added to the end of the clip.  
• Interval recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be  
deactivated also if you change the [w Other Functions] > [24.00P], [NTSC/PAL], [Bit Rate/Resolution] or  
[Frame Rate] setting.  
• The time code advances by the number of frames recorded. If the running mode of the time code (A 73) is  
set to [Free Run] or the time code is input from an external source, the running mode will switch to [Rec Run]  
during special recording mode. When special recording mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to  
its previous setting.  
• During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the TIME CODE terminal or  
HD/SD SDI terminal.  
Frame Recording Mode  
Set the number of frames in advance. We recommend opthe cacorder remotely or stabilizing the  
camcorder, for example, on a tripod. Sound is not ordeis mode.  
Configuring Frame Recording Mde  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Rec Frames] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Frame Rec] [Rec rames]  
[Frame Rec]  
2 Select the desired number of frames and then press SET.  
• Available options depend on the frame rate used: 1, 3, 6 and 9  
frames (when [w Other Functions] > [24.00P] is set to [On] or  
[Rec Frames]  
[Frame Rate] is set to [23.98P], [29.97P] or [59.94i]) or 2, 6 and 12  
frames (when [w Other Functions] > [Frame Rate] is set to [25.00P],  
[1]  
[50.00i], [50.00P] or [59.94P]).  
Activating Frame Recording Mode and Recording  
[w Other Functions]  
[Special Rec]  
[Off]  
1 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Rec]  
2 Select [Frame Rec] and then press SET.  
• [FRM STBY] appears at the top of the screen (with [FRM] flashing).  
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• The camcorder automatically records the set number of frames.  
• The tally lamp illuminates.  
• [FRM STBY] changes to [Ü FRM REC] while recording frames and [Ü FRM STBY] when frames are not  
being recorded.  
• Repeat until you finish recording.  
4 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Rec]  
     
Special Recording Modes  
5 Select [Off] and then press SET.  
• Frame recording mode ends and all of the recorded frames are joined together into one clip.  
• The tally lamp goes out and [STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
95  
NOTES  
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time.  
• While recording, you cannot change the number of frames.  
• Some frames at the point the recording was stopped may be recorded and added to the end of the clip.  
• Frame recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be  
deactivated also if you change the [w Other Functions] > [24.00P], [NTSC/PAL], [Bit Rate/Resolution] or  
[Frame Rate] setting.  
• The time code advances by the number of frames recorded. If the running mode of the time code (A 73) is  
set to [Free Run] or the time code is input from an external source, the running mode will switch to [Rec Run]  
during special recording mode. When special recording mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to  
its previous setting.  
• During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the TIME CODE terminal or  
HD/SD SDI terminal.  
Slow & Fast Motion Mode  
When you set [w Other Functions] > [Frame Rate] to a sive frme rate (A 55), the camcorder can  
record with a frame rate (shooting frame rate) that differem the playback frame rate. Recording a clip at a  
higher frame rate than the [Frame Rate] setting in slow motion effect during playback (up to 1/2.5 of  
the original speed). Conversely, a lower frame ralt in a fast motion effect (up to 60x the original speed).  
Sound is not recorded in this mode.  
Configuring Slow & Fast Motion Md
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [S&F Frame Rate] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Slow & Fast Motion] > [S&F Frame Rate]  
[Slow & Fast Motion]  
2 Select the desired shooting frame rate and then press SET.  
• Available shooting frame rates depend on other video configuration  
settings in use.  
[S&F Frame Rate]  
Available Shooting Frame Rates  
Video Configuration  
Shooting Frame Rates  
(fps, in 1 fps increments)  
Type of Recording  
NTSC / 24.00P  
Resolution  
1920 x 1080  
1280 x 720  
1920 x 1080  
1280 x 720  
1 to 30  
1 to 60  
1 to 25  
1 to 50  
PAL  
       
Special Recording Modes  
Activating Slow & Fast Motion Mode and Recording  
[w Other Functions]  
[Special Rec]  
[Off]  
1 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Rec]  
2 Select [Slow & Fast Motion] and then press SET.  
• [S&F STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
96  
• The selected shooting frame rate appears on the right of the screen  
next to the [w Other Functions] > [Frame Rate] setting (the  
playback frame rate).  
Shooting frame rate  
Playback frame rate  
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• The camcorder automatically records at the set frame rate.  
• The tally lamp illuminates.  
• [S&F STBY] changes to [Ü S&F REC] while recording.  
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording
• The camcorder records the clip.  
• The tally lamp goes out and [S&F STBY] aphe p of the screen.  
NOTES  
You can use only one special recordimode t a time. In addition, slow & fast motion mode cannot be used  
with double slot recording.  
• While recording, you cannot change the shooting frame rate.  
• For lower shooting frame rates, it may take approximately 1 second to stop recording.  
• Slow & fast motion mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be  
deactivated also if you change the [w Other Functions] > [24.00P], [NTSC/PAL] or [Bit Rate/Resolution]  
setting.  
• When the bit rate is set to 50 Mbps (A 55), relay recording is not available during slow motion recording.  
• The time code advances while video is recorded. If the running mode of the time code (A 73) is set to [Free  
Run] or the time code is input from an external source, the running mode will switch to [Rec Run] during  
special recording mode. When special recording mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to its  
previous setting.  
• During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the TIME CODE terminal or  
HD/SD SDI terminal.  
Pre-recording Mode  
[w Other Functions]  
When pre-recording mode is activated, the camcorder starts recording  
continuously into a temporary memory of approximately 3 seconds so  
when you press the START/STOP button, the clip will contain also  
[Special Rec]  
approximately 3 seconds of video and audio recorded before you pressed  
the button.  
[Off]  
   
Special Recording Modes  
1 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Rec]  
2 Select [Pre Rec] and then press SET.  
• [PRE REC STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
97  
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• The tally lamp illuminates.  
• [PRE REC STBY] changes to [Ü PRE REC] while recording.  
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.  
• The camcorder records the clip, including approximately 3 seconds of video and audio recorded before the  
START/STOP button was pressed.  
• The tally lamp goes out and [PRE REC STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
NOTES  
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time.  
• Pre-recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be  
deactivated also if you change the [w Other Functions] > [24.00P], [NTSC/PAL], [Bit Rate/Resolution] or  
[Frame Rate] setting.  
• During pre-recording mode, the time code will be recorded with the running mode (A 73) set to [Free Run],  
regardless of the previous setting. Alternatively, you can use an extnal time code signal. When the time code  
is recorded, it will include the 3 seconds before the START/STObon was pressed. When special recording  
mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to itus seng.  
Special Recording Modes  
98  
Customization  
4
99  
Assignable Buttons  
The camcorder conveniently features 15* buttons to which you can assign various functions. By assigning often-  
used functions, you can quickly access them with a single press of a button. Some assignable buttons are  
located on the monitor unit or grip unit, so their availability depends on the camcorder configuration used.  
* In  
mode, only assignable buttons 1 to 9 are available.  
Operating modes:  
On the grip unit:  
On the monitor unit:  
Changing the Assigned Funcon  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Assign Button] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Assign Button]  
[Assign Button]  
2 Select the button to change and then press SET.  
• A list of available functions appears.  
[1 Magnification]  
[2 Peaking]  
[3 Zebra]  
[4 WFM (LCD)]  
[5 Headphone +]  
[6 Headphone -]  
[7 Magnification]  
[8 WFM (LCD)]  
[9 Edge Monitor]  
[10-15 (NONE)]  
• The quick reference shows the default settings for each assignable  
button. By default, buttons 10 to 15 have no assignable function set.  
3 Select the desired function and then press SET.  
• If you selected [User Setting (NONE)], the menu will change from  
orange to blue to indicate you are selecting a menu setting to register.  
Continue the procedure to register a menu setting. Otherwise, you do  
not need to perform the rest of the procedure.  
4 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to register  
and then press SET.  
• The selected menu setting will be registered to the customizable slot and to the assignable button.  
• The name of the selected menu setting will be listed instead of [User Setting (NONE)] and the customizable  
slot will be marked by a  
NOTES  
.
You can check the two [Assign Button] status screens (A 157) to see what functions are set for the  
assignable buttons.  
You can reset only the functions assigned to the assignable buttons, without affecting other camera settings,  
with the [w Other Functions] >[Reset] > [Assignable Buttons] function. All the assignable buttons will return  
to their default function.  
       
Assignable Buttons  
Using an Assignable Button  
After you assign a function to one of the buttons, press the button to activate the function. For some functions,  
an options menu may appear. In such case, select the desired option and then press SET.  
Assignable Functions  
Functions can be set separately in  
100  
mode and  
mode. Refer to the following table for assignable  
functions and available modes.  
Function name  
Description  
A
[Peaking]  
[Zebra]  
Turns peaking on/off.  
Ü
Ü
Turns zebra patterns on/off.  
Activates video scopes in the following sequence:  
Waveform monitor J Vectorscope J Off  
[WFM (LCD)]  
Ü
Ü
[Edge Monitor]  
[Magnification]  
[Color Bars]  
[Markers]  
Turns the edge monitor on/off.  
Turns magnification on/off.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Turns color bars on/off.  
Turns onscreen markers on/off.  
Opens the [LCD Setup] submenu.  
Opens the [VF Setup] submenu.  
Turns the B&W mode of the LCD and viewfinder on/off.  
[LCD Setup]  
[VF Setup]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
[LCD/VF B&W]  
Turns on/off the inclusion of onscreen displays on video output fre camcorder’s  
terminals (both HD and SD video output).  
[Onscreen Display]  
Ü
Ü
[Add Shot Mark 1] Adds an " mark to the clip.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Add Shot Mark 2]* Adds an # mark to the clip.  
[Add $ Mark]  
[Add % Mark]  
[Time Code]  
Adds an $ mark to the clip.  
Adds a % mark to the clip
Displays the [Time Code] subenu.  
[Time Code Hold]* Puts the time code display on holsumes it.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Headphone +]  
[Headphone -]  
Increases the headphone volume.  
Reduces the headphone volume.  
[Audio Output CH] Switches the audio output channel.  
[Audio Level]  
[Photo]*  
Turns the audio level meter on/off.  
Records a photo.  
Enters the direct setting mode, replicating the function of the camcorder’s FUNC.  
button.  
[FUNC.]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Enters the direct setting mode with the shutter speed highlighted and ready to be  
adjusted.  
[FUNC. Shutter]  
[FUNC. ISO/Gain]  
[FUNC. WB]  
Enters the direct setting mode with the ISO speed or gain value highlighted and ready  
to be adjusted.  
Enters the direct setting mode with the white balance highlighted and ready to be  
adjusted.  
[My Menu]  
Opens the [My Menu] customized submenu.  
Opens the [Initialize Media] submenu.  
Ü
Ü
[Initialize Media]  
Ü
[User Setting  
(NONE)]*  
Customizable slot. Assign to the button any menu setting you would like to register.  
Ü
Ü
* Function can be used only by assigning it to a button.  
 
Custom Picture Settings  
Custom Picture Settings  
You can preset a number of picture-related settings (A 104). After changing individual settings to your  
preference, you can save the whole set in the camcorder or SD card as a custom picture file. You can then load  
the file at a later date to change the current settings to the preset levels you selected. You can even embed the  
custom picture settings in clips recorded to a CF card or photos recorded to an SD card. Conversely, you can  
have the camcorder record clips and photos without embedding custom picture settings.  
101  
You can save up to 9 different custom picture files on the camcorder and up to 20 custom picture files on an SD  
card. Custom picture files can be copied between the camcorder and recording media.  
Custom preset files created with previous Canon camcorders are not compatible with this camcorder. Custom  
picture files created with this camcorder are compatible only with other C300 and C300 PL camcorders.  
Operating modes:  
Selecting Custom Picture Files  
Select a custom picture file to apply its settings to your recordings or to  
edit, rename, protect, or transfer it. When [~ Camera Setup] >  
[/ CINEMA Locked] is set to [On], the custom picture menu cannoe  
accessed and custom picture files cannot be used.  
1 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button.  
• The custom picture menu appears. The currey selefile  
appears next to the - icon or [Off] if no filted
2 Select [- / Select File] and thepess
You can select from a list of custm picture filehe camcorder  
and SD card. Files in the camcordbegin with [C1] to [C9]; those  
on the SD card begin with [SD1] to [2
3 Select the desired file and then press SET.  
• Select [Off] to record without applying any custom picture settings.  
To apply the files settings, press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu. An icon  
representing the selected custom picture file will appear on the left of the screen.  
To perform other operations on the file, continue with the following procedures.  
Preset Custom Picture Files  
By default, the custom picture files in the camcorder in file slots [C8] and [C9] are protected. Remove the  
protection (A 102) to edit the file. The following describes when to use the preset files.  
[C8: CINEMA]: Uses the Canon Log gamma and color matrix for an outstanding dynamic range and an  
image suitable for processing in post-production.  
[C9: EOS Std.]: Reproduces the image quality and look (high contrast, vibrant colors) of an EOS digital SLR  
camera with its picture style set to [Standard].  
Editing a Custom Picture File’s Settings  
1 After selecting a file, select [, / Edit File] and then press SET.  
2 Select a setting and then press SET.  
         
Custom Picture Settings  
3 Change the setting to the desired level and then press SET.  
• Refer to the table Available Custom Picture Settings (A 104) for details on the various settings.  
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings, as necessary.  
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu and apply the new custom  
picture settings.  
102  
Resetting the current file’s settings to default values  
1 Select [Reset] and then press SET.  
2 Select the default values and then press SET.  
• Select [NEUTRAL] to reset to neutral default values (equivalent to not using custom picture settings at all) or  
[CINEMA] or [EOS Std.] if you want to replicate these preset settings, for example as a starting point to edit  
them further.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
Renaming Custom Picture Files  
[, / Edit File]  
1 After selecting a file, open the [Rename] submenu.  
[, / Edit File] > [Rename]  
• A screen appears that displays the current file name woran
selection frame on the first character.  
[Rename]  
2 Select an alphanumeric character or symbmo(Ð) to the next field.  
• Change the rest of the name in the same w
3 Select [Set] and then press SET.  
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE buttto exthe custom picture menu and apply the selected custom  
picture settings.  
Protecting Custom Picture Files  
[, / Edit File]  
Protecting a custom picture file prevents its settings from being  
accidentally changed.  
[Protect]  
1 After selecting a file, open the [Protect] submenu.  
[, / Edit File] > [Protect]  
2 Select [Protect] and then press SET.  
• In the custom picture menu, i will appear next to the file name.  
To remove protection settings, select [Unprotect] instead.  
3 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu and apply the selected custom  
picture settings.  
Transferring Custom Picture Files  
You can transfer custom picture files between the camcorder and SD card. When the custom picture file is in the  
camcorder, use [Copy To *] or [Load From *] depending on the operation you wish to perform. Similarly,  
when the custom picture file is on an SD card, use [Copy To Cam.] or [Load From Cam].  
     
Custom Picture Settings  
Copying a File from the Camcorder to an SD Card  
[+ / Transfer File]  
1 After selecting a file in the camcorder, open the [Copy To *] submenu.  
[+ / Transfer File] > [Copy To *]  
[Copy To *]  
103  
2 Select the file slot on the SD card under which to save the file and then  
press SET.  
• If there are available slots, you can select [New File] to save the file in the first available slot.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The currently selected file will be copied to the selected slot on the SD card, overwriting the file in that slot.  
When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu and apply the selected custom picture  
settings.  
Replacing a File in the Camcorder with a File on an SD Card  
[+ / Transfer File]  
1 After selecting a file in the camcorder to replace, open the [Load  
From *] submenu.  
[+ / Transfer File] > [Load From *]  
[Load From *]  
2 Select the file to transfer to the camcorder and then press SET.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The file in the camcorder will be overwritten by the one n the card. When the confirmation screen  
appears, press SET.  
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit thstom ure menu and apply the selected custom picture  
settings.  
Copying a File from an SD Carto the Carder  
[+ / Transfer File]  
1 After selecting a file on the SD card, oen th[Copy To Cam.]  
submenu.  
[Copy To Cam.]  
[+ / Transfer File] > [Copy To Cam.]  
2 Select the file slot under which to save the file and then press SET.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The currently selected file will be copied to the selected slot on the camcorder, overwriting the file in that  
slot. When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu and apply the selected custom picture  
settings.  
Replacing a File on an SD Card with a File in the Camcorder  
[+ / Transfer File]  
1 After selecting a file on the SD card to replace, open the [Load From  
Cam.] submenu.  
[Load From Cam.]  
[+ / Transfer File] > [Load From Cam.]  
2 Select the file to transfer to the SD card and then press SET.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The file on the SD card will be overwritten by the one on the camcorder. When the confirmation screen  
appears, press SET.  
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu and apply the selected custom picture  
settings.  
Custom Picture Settings  
NOTES  
You can also copy a custom picture file embedded in a clip to the camcorder (A 122).  
104  
Embedding Custom Picture Settings in a Recording  
[w Other Functions]  
By default, when you record video or take a photo with custom picture  
settings applied to it, the custom picture file used to record it is  
embedded in the image file. Later, those embedded settings in the video  
or photo can be copied to the camcorder (A 144) and be applied to  
future recordings. You may find that embedding custom picture settings in  
a recording helps you keep track of them, such as verifying what settings  
were used for a particular recording.  
[Add / File]  
[To Clip] … [On]  
[To Photo] … [On]  
1 Open the [Add / File] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Add / File]  
2 Select [To Clip] or [To Photo] and then press SET.  
• Selecting [To Clip] will embed the custom picture file in a clip while selecting [To Photo] will embed the file in  
a photo.  
3 Select [On] or [Off] and then press SET.  
Available Custom Picture Settings  
The following are the available settingsEven if no picture file is selected, the default settings are still  
applied to the picture.  
[Gamma]  
The gamma curve changes the overall look of the image. (Default: [Normal 1]).  
[Normal 1] to [Normal 4]: These settings are suitable for viewing the image on a TV monitor. Highlights in [Normal  
2] are brighter than those of [Normal 1]. Dark tones in the lower part of the gamma  
curve for [Normal 3] (ITU-R BT.709 standard) and [Normal 4] are more pronounced than  
those of [Normal 2].  
[Cine 1] or [Cine 2]:  
Use [Cine 1] for a gamma curve that results in a picture with a cinema-like feel and  
cinema-like tones. [Cine 2] has softer contrasts than does [Cine 1] but is also suitable  
for creating a cinema-like picture.  
[Canon Log]:  
[EOS Std.]:  
Applies a logarithmic gamma curve for outstanding dynamic range. Requires image  
processing in post-production.  
This gamma curve approximates the look of an EOS digital SLR camera when the  
picture style is set to [Standard] (high contrast, vibrant colors).  
       
Custom Picture Settings  
Gamma  
Canon log  
Cine 1  
Cine 2  
Normal 2/3/4  
105  
Normal 1  
Canon Log  
Normal 4  
Normal 3  
Normal 1/2  
Input  
Input  
[Black]  
Controls the black level and color cast of blacks.  
[Master Pedestal]  
The master pedestal increases or decreases the black level. Higher settings will make dark areas brighter but  
decrease contrast. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Dfault: 0)  
[Master Black]  
Corrects color cast in blacks.  
[Red]: -50 to 50 (Default: 0)  
[Green]: -50 to 50 (Default: 0)  
[Blue]: -50 to 50 (Default: 0)  
[Black Gamma]  
Controls the lower part of the gamma cve (daareas of the image). This setting is not available when [Gamma]  
is set to [Canon Log].  
[Level]: Raises or lowers the lower part of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
[Range]: Selects the range in which dark areas are affected. This setting can be adjusted from -5 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
[Point]: Determines the shape of the lower part of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from -1 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
Black Gamma  
Point  
Input  
[Low Key Satur.]  
Adjusts color saturation in dark areas.  
       
Custom Picture Settings  
[Enable]: Activates/deactivates the setting. (Default: [Off])  
[Level]: Specifies how saturated colors are in dark areas. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default:  
0)  
[Knee]  
106  
Controls the upper part of the gamma curve (highlights of the image). By compressing the highlights, you can  
prevent parts of the image from being overexposed. This is not available when [Gamma] is set to [Cine 1], [Cine  
2], [Canon Log] or [EOS Std.].  
[Enable]:  
[Slope]:  
Activates/deactivates the setting. (Default: [On])  
Determines the slope of the gamma curve above the knee point. This setting can be adjusted from -  
35 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Point]:  
Sets the knee point of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 109. (Default: 95)  
[Saturation]: Adjusts color saturation in highlights. This setting can be adjusted from -10 to 10. (Default: 0)  
Knee Slope Knee Point  
Input  
Input  
[Sharpness]  
Sets the sharpness of the output and recorsignal.  
[Level]: Sets the sharpness level. This setting can be adjusted from -10 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[H Detail Freq.]: Sets the center frequency of horizontal sharpness. Setting higher values increases the  
frequency, which, in turn, increases the sharpness. This setting can be adjusted from -8 to 8.  
(Default: 0)  
[Coring]:  
Reduces noise artifacts caused by high sharpness levels.  
[Level]: Sets the coring level. Higher values prevent sharpness from being applied to minute details, resulting in  
less noise. This setting can be adjusted from -30 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[D-Ofst]: You can use [D-Ofst], [D-Curve] and [D-Depth] to adjust the coring level based on brightness. [D-Ofst]  
sets the coring level of the minimum brightness level. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[D-Curve]: Sets the curve of the coring adjustment. This curve is the change from [Level] to [D-Ofst]. This setting  
can be adjusted from 0 to 8. (Default: 0)  
[D-Depth]: Sets a multiplier to [D-Ofst] that determines the coring level adjustment based on brightness.  
Positive values raise the coring level in dark areas and negative values lower the level. This setting can be  
adjusted from -4 to 4. (Default: 0)  
[HV Detail Bal.]: Adjusts the ratio between horizontal and vertical detail. Higher values emphasize vertical detail  
while lower values emphasize horizontal detail. This setting can be adjusted from -8 to 8.  
(Default: 0)  
[Limit]:  
Restricts how much sharpness is applied. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
   
Custom Picture Settings  
[Select]:  
In addition to the sharpness set by [Level], [Select] sets the sharpness for areas with higher  
frequencies. Higher values apply more sharpness to areas with higher frequencies. Use this for  
subjects in which normal sharpening is not effective. This setting is not available when the video  
configuration is 720P. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 15. (Default: 0)  
107  
[
Knee Aperture]: Allows you to set the sharpness of only the areas above the knee point by adjusting the gain and  
slope. This is not available when [Gamma] is set to [Cine 1], [Cine 2], [Canon Log] or [EOS Std.].  
[Gain]: Sets the amount of sharpness. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 9. (Default: 0)  
[Slope]: Sets the slope of the sharpness. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 3, with 0 having no slope, 1  
having a steep slope and 3 having a gradual slope. (Default: 1)  
[Level Depend]: Lowers the amount of sharpness applied to dark areas of the image.  
[Level]: Sets the brightness of the dark areas of the image that will be affected. This setting can be adjusted  
from 0 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Slope]: Determines the slope of the area between the upper and lower parts of the gamma curve. This setting  
can be adjusted from 0 to 3, with 0 having no slope, 1 having a steep slope and 3 having a gradual slope.  
(Default: 0)  
[Offset]: Adjusts the sharpness level of dark areas in the image. Setting higher values will lower the sharpness  
level. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Noise Reduction]  
Reduces the amount of noise that appears in the image. Select a levfrom 1 (lowest level) to 12 (highest level),  
or select [Off] to turn the noise reduction off. (Default: [Off])  
[Skin Detail]  
The camcorder applies a softening filter to areas e picwith skin tones to give a more pleasant  
appearance. By changing these settings, you cmine what areas will be detected as skin tones. A zebra  
pattern will appear over areas on the scen thacted as having skin tones.  
[Effect Level]: Adjusts the level of the er. The avaptions are [Off], [Low], [Middle] and [High]. (Default:  
[Off])  
[Hue]:  
Adjusts the hue for detectiof kin tones. This setting can be adjusted from -16 to 16.  
(Default: 0)  
[Chroma]:  
[Area]:  
Adjusts the color saturation for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
Adjusts the color range for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
[Y Level]:  
Adjusts the brightness for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
[Selective NR]  
The camcorder detects the characteristics of a certain color or tone and applies a noise reduction filter to the  
targeted areas. A zebra pattern will appear over targeted areas on the screen.  
[Effect Level]:Adjusts the level of the noise reduction filter. The available options are [Off], [Low], [Middle] and  
[High]. (Default: [Off])  
[Hue]:  
Adjusts the hue for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 0)  
[Chroma]:  
Adjusts the color saturation for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
[Area]:  
Adjusts the color range for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
[Y Level]:  
Adjusts the brightness for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
[Color Matrix]  
Color matrix affects the color tones throughout the whole image.  
         
Custom Picture Settings  
[
Select]: Available options are [Normal 1] to [Normal 4], [Cine 1] and [Cine 2], [Canon Log] and [EOS Std.].  
Generally, this is the same setting as [Gamma]. After selecting an option, you can make more precise  
adjustments. (Default: [Normal 1])  
[Gain]: Adjusts the color intensity. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Phase]: Adjusts the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18. (Default: 0)  
108  
[R-G]: The R-G matrix changes the tint of the picture along the cyan/green and red/magenta gradations. This  
setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[R-B]: The R-B matrix changes the tint of the picture along the cyan/blue and red/yellow gradations. This  
setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[G-R]: The G-R matrix changes the tint of the picture along the magenta/red and green/cyan gradations. This  
setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[G-B]: The G-B matrix changes the tint of the picture along the magenta/blue and green/yellow gradations.  
This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[B-R]: The B-R matrix changes the tint of the picture along the yellow/red and blue/cyan gradations. This  
setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[B-G]: The B-G matrix changes the tint of the picture along the yellow/green and blue/magenta gradations.  
This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[White Balance]  
Adjusts the amount of white balance throughout the whole image.  
[R Gain]: Adjust the intensity of red tones. This setting can be adjusrom -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[G Gain]: Adjust the intensity of green tones. This setting adjustfrom -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[B Gain]: Adjust the intensity of blue tones. This setting can djusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Color Correction]  
The camcorder detects the characteriscs of a cerr (color phase, chroma, area and Y level) and corrects  
them when recording. You can set the olor correction for up to two different areas (A and B).  
[Select Area]: Selects the area or areas o corct. Available options are [Area A], [Area B] and [Area A&B].  
Select [Off] to turn this setting off. (Default: [Off])  
[Area A Setting]: Determines the area in which colors will be corrected.  
[Phase]: Adjusts the color phase for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 0)  
[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Area]: Adjusts the color range for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Area A Revision]: Sets the amount of correction for area A.  
[Level]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color saturation. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
[Phase]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18.  
(Default: 0)  
[Area B Setting]: Determines the area in which colors will be corrected.  
[Phase]: Adjusts the color phase for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 0)  
[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Area]: Adjusts the color range for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Area B Revision]: Sets the amount of correction for area B.  
[Level]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color saturation. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
[Phase]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18.  
(Default: 0)  
   
Custom Picture Settings  
[Other Functions]  
[Setup Level]: Adjusts the black level set by the [Black] and [Master Pedestal] settings.  
[Level]: Determines the amount of adjustment to be made. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
109  
[Press]: Compresses the dynamic range of the video signal so that it does not exceed 100%. Available options  
are [On] and [Off]. (Default: [Off])  
[Clip At 100%]: When the video signal exceeds 100%, this function clips the white level at 100%. Available  
options are [On] and [Off]. (Default: [Off])  
Canon Log Gamma  
The Canon Log gamma setting makes full use of the newly developed sensor to offer spectacular dynamic  
range. Clips recorded using Canon Log gamma need to be processed in post-production by applying a LUT  
(look-up table). By fine-tuning the LUT you use in post-production you can perfectly realize the artistic vision you  
desire. For more details about available LUTs, visit you local Canon Web site.  
Checking clips recorded with Canon Log gamma  
When Canon Log gamma is used, the image displayed on the screen will appear darker than usual. You can use  
the view assistance function to display an image that approximaes tone that would be obtained using a  
normal gamma setting. View assistance is only applied on thcamcer screen; it will not affect your recordings  
or the video signal output from the various terminals.  
1 Open the [View Assist.] submenu.  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [View Assist.]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
will appear on the lower ft of the scr
       
Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays  
Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays  
Customize the camcorder to match your shooting style and needs. Use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom  
Function] setting to adjust how some of the camcorders controls and functions operate in  
mode.  
Similarly, use the [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2] setting to customize the  
onscreen displays that appear during recording. You can save these preferences along with other menu settings  
to an SD card and use them again later (A 111).  
110  
Customizing Functions  
[w Other Functions]  
The following table describes which functions can be customized using  
[Custom Function]. For more details, refer to [Custom Function] (A 154).  
[Custom Function]  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Custom Function] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function]  
2 Select the desired function.  
3 Change the setting option and then press SET.  
Customizable Functions with [Custom Function]  
Menu item  
[Shockless WB]  
[Control Dial]  
ription  
Creates a softer transition when the ws chged.  
Select the function of the ctrol al on er or grip unit.  
[Control Dial Dir.]  
[Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.]  
[SELECT Dial Dir.]  
Changes the direction of tadjustment whrating the control dial on the camcorder.  
Changes the direction of the justmewhen operating the control dial on the grip unit.  
Changes the direction of the adjustment when operating the SELECT dial.  
Automatically switches the screen to B&W while the focus assist functions (peaking and magnification) are activated. You  
can have the screen switch to B&W when only the peaking is activated, when only the magnification is activated or when  
both are activated.  
[F. Assist. B&W]  
[Scan Reverse Rec] Inverts the recorded image horizontally and/or vertically.  
[Character Rec]  
When this function is set to [On], all of the onscreen displays will be recorded to the clip exactly as they appear on the screen.  
Customizing Onscreen Displays  
[£ LCD/VF Setup]  
For details on which onscreen displays can be customized, refer to  
Onscreen Displays (A 52). For details on the setting options, refer to  
[Custom Display 1] and [Custom Display 2] (A 150).  
[Custom Display 1]  
[Custom Display 2]  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2] submenu.  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2]  
2 Select the desired onscreen display.  
3 Change the setting option and then press SET.  
           
Saving and Loading Camera Settings  
Saving and Loading Camera Settings  
After you adjust custom picture settings and settings in the various menus, you can save those settings on an  
SD card. You can load those settings at a later date or on another C300 or C300 PL camcorder so that you can  
use that camcorder in that same exact way.  
111  
Operating modes:  
Saving Camera Settings to an SD Card  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Save To *] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Transfer Menu//] > [Save To *]  
[Transfer Menu//]  
2 Select [Menu] or [Menu+/] and then press SET.  
• Selecting [Menu] will save menu settings and [Menu+/] will save  
[Save To *]  
menu and custom picture settings.  
3 Select [OK] and press SET.  
• The current settings are saved to the SD card. If the SD card already has camera settings on it, they will be  
overwritten.  
4 When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
Loading Camera Settings from an S
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Load From *] submnu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Transfer Meu//] > [Load From *]  
[Transfer Menu//]  
2 Select [Menu] or [Menu+/] and then press SET.  
• Selecting [Menu] will load menu settings and [Menu+/] will load  
[Load From *]  
menu and custom picture settings.  
3 Select [OK] and press SET.  
• After the camcorders current settings are replaced with the settings saved on the SD card, the screen will  
turn black momentarily and the camcorder will restart.  
NOTES  
• The SD card includes a text file that lists the camera settings. You can check the settings by using a USB card  
reader to access the SD card on a computer. In the “PRIVATE\CAMSET” folder, open the file “CAMSET3.TXT”.  
• When loading camera settings from an SD card, even protected custom picture files in the camcorder will be  
replaced.  
• For your protection, when the camcorders settings are saved on an SD card, the following settings under  
[w Other Functions] > [Wi-Fi] are not saved: the encryption key/WEP index key in the wireless LAN setup of  
each of the configuration files [No. 1] to [No. 5] and the password in the camcorder settings.  
• Camera settings from Canon XF100 / XF105 / XF300 and XF305 camcorders cannot be used with this  
camcorder.  
       
Saving and Loading Camera Settings  
112  
Playback  
5
113  
Playback  
This section explains how to play back clips recorded on a CF card. For details on playing back clips using an  
external monitor, refer to Connecting to an External Monitor (A 128). For details on viewing photos on the SD  
card, refer to Viewing Photos (A 141).  
Operating modes:  
Clip Index Screen  
Playback functions are accessed from the clip index screen. To open the  
clip index screen, set the camcorder to  
mode.  
Set the Q switch to MEDIA.  
• The camcorder switches to  
me anthe clip index screen appears.  
7
8
9
1
2
10  
3
4
5
6
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
       
Playback  
1
2
3
$ mark/% mark (A 91, 120)  
Orange selection frame  
Relay recording: Appears when a clip begins on  
one CF card and continues on the other. (A 44)  
Shot mark (A 90, 124)  
Recording date and time  
Clip name (A 51)  
Clip thumbnail (A 125)  
Currently selected CF card slot (A 43)  
9
Clip number / Total number of clips  
10 Recording date (month and day only) and time  
11 Special recording mode (A 93)  
12 Time code of thumbnail  
114  
4
5
6
7
8
13 Total recording time  
14 Embedded custom picture file (A 101)  
15 Bit rate and resolution (A 55)  
16 Frame rate  
v
Switching Between the CF Card Slots  
If both CF card slots contain a CF card, you can switch between them as  
necessary.  
Operating modes:  
Press the SLOT SELECT button.  
• The access indicator of the selected CF card slot will illuminate in n.  
Switching to Other Index Screens  
All of the clips on a CF card can be acssed from p index screen.  
However, you can switch to other index creens hat show only clips with  
an $ mark ([$ Mark] index screen), clipwith % mark ([% Mark]  
index screen), or photos* ([Photos] index screen).  
* Photos are saved on the SD card.  
1 Press the INDEX button.  
• The index screen selection menu appears.  
2 Select the desired index screen and then press SET.  
• The selected index screen appears.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• Press the INDEX button again to return to the clip index screen.  
Playing Back Clips  
You can play back clips from the clip index screen, [$ Mark] index screen  
and [% Mark] index screen. Use the playback control buttons on the  
monitor unit. When the monitor unit is not attached, you have limited  
playback control options (play/pause/stop only) with the buttons on the  
camcorder and full playback control options using the joystick and  
joystick guide.  
1 Move the orange selection frame to the clip you want to play  
back.  
2 Press the Ò button to start playback.  
       
Playback  
• Playback will start from the clip selected and continue until the end of the last clip in the index screen. When  
the last frame of the last clip is reached, playback will be paused.  
• Press the Ò button again or press SET to pause/resume the playback.  
• Press the Ñ button to stop the playback and return to the index screen.  
115  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do  
so may result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not open the cover of the CF card slot being accessed.  
NOTES  
You may notice brief stops in video or audio playback between clips.  
Onscreen Displays  
7
8 9 10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
4
5
6
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Remaining battery time (A 53)  
Joystick guide (A 116)  
Shutter speed1 (A 58)  
# Aperture value1 (A 64)  
ISO Speed/Gain1 (A 61)  
Recording date and time2  
Playback operation  
11 Time code (A 73)  
12 Clip number / Total number of clips  
13 Bit rate and resolution (A 55)  
14 Frame rate (A 55)  
15 Embedded custom picture file (A 101)  
16 Output displays (A 130)  
17 User bit (A 76)  
Selected CF card  
Relay recording  
18 Audio output channel (A 131)  
19 Audio level meter  
10 $ mark/% mark (A 91, 120)  
1
2
Appears when [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Metadata Display] > [Camera Data] is set to [On].  
Appears when [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Metadata Display] > [Date/Time] is set to [On].  
   
Playback  
7 Playback operation  
Ð PLAY  
Playback  
Ý PAUSE  
Ô/Ó  
F FWD ×  
Ø F REV  
Playback pause  
116  
Frame reverse/Frame advance  
Fast playback*  
Fast reverse playback*  
* The playback speed (x5, x15 or x60) will also appear in the indicator.  
9 Relay recording  
Appears when a clip begins on one CF card and continues uninterrupted on the other. 5 indicates the first  
part of the recording, 6 indicates the middle part(s) and 7 indicates the last part.  
Playback Controls  
When you play back a clip, operate the buttons on camcorders body or on  
the monitor unit or use the joystick and joystick guide to use fast playback,  
play back frame-by-frame or skip clips. Refer to the following table.  
Available Playback Types  
Playback type  
Operation  
Buttons: Press the Ø or × b.  
Joystick: During playback, push up oown.  
Repeat to increase the playback oximely 5x J  
15x J 60x the normspeed.  
Fast playback  
Frame advance/reverse  
Joystick: During playck pause, push the joystick up or down.  
Skip to the beginning of  
the next clip  
Buttons: Press the Ù utton
Joystick: Push the joystick right.  
Skip to the beginning of  
the current clip  
Buttons: Press the Ú button.  
Joystick: Push the joystick left.  
Buttons: Press the Ú button twice.  
Joystick: Push the joystick left twice.  
Skip to the previous clip  
Return to playback mode  
Buttons: Press the Ò button.  
Joystick: Press the joystick itself (SET button).  
NOTES  
• There is no audio during any of the playback types listed in the previous table.  
• During some special playback modes, you may notice some anomalies (blocky video artifacts, banding, etc.)  
in the playback picture.  
• The speed indicated on the screen is approximate.  
• During frame advance, the time advanced between frames depends on the video configuration used:  
0.2 seconds (for 1280x720/24.00P, 1280x720/23.98P or 1280x720/59.94P), 0.25 seconds (for 1280x720/  
50.00P) and 0.5 seconds for other video configurations.  
You can press the DISP. button to turn the joystick guide display on and off.  
   
Playback  
Adjusting the Volume  
During playback, audio will be available through the × (headphone)  
terminal; the audio signal will also be output through the HD/SD SDI  
terminal and the HDMI OUT terminal.  
117  
× (headphone)  
terminal  
Adjusting the Headphone Volume  
Press the HEADPHONE +/- buttons to adjust the volume.  
NOTES  
• For details on changing the audio channel, refer to Selecting the Audio  
Channel (A 131).  
• You can also adjust the headphone volume with the [¡ Audio Setup]  
> [Audio Output] > [Headphone Volume] setting.  
HEADPHONE +/- buttons  
   
Clip Operations  
Clip Operations  
Besides playing back a clip, you can perform other operations such as deleting a clip or displaying clip  
information. This is done through the clip menu, which contains different functions depending on the index  
screen. You can use the functions in the [w Other Functions] menu to perform some of the operations on all the  
clips. Refer to the following table for available functions and refer to the following pages for more details of the  
functions.  
118  
Operating modes:  
Clip Menu Functions  
Index screen  
1
Menu item  
Description  
A
[$ Mark]/  
[% Mark]  
[Shot Mark] /  
[Expand Clip]  
Clip  
Ü
Ü
[Display Clip Info]  
Displays various information about a clip.  
Ü
[Add $ Mark]/  
[Delete $ Mark]  
2
Adds or deletes an $ mark.  
Ü
[Add % Mark]/  
[Delete % Mark]  
3
Adds or deletes a % mark.  
Ü
Ü
2
[Copy Clip]  
Copies a clip from one CF card to the other.  
Deletes a clip.  
Ü
3
[Delete Clip]  
Ü
Displays an index screen of all the frames of a c
have either shot mark.  
[Shot Mark]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Displays an index screen of all the frlip th
have the " mark.  
[Shot Mark 1]  
[Shot Mark 2]  
Displays an index screen f all the framthat  
have the # mark.  
Displays an index screen tt showames of a clip at  
a fixed interval.  
[Expand Clip]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Delete User Memo]  
[Copy / File]  
Deletes the user memo and GPS information of a clip.  
Copies the custom picture file from a clip to the  
camcorder.  
[Add Shot Mark 1]/  
[Del. Shot Mark 1]  
Adds or deletes a " mark.  
Ü
Ü
[Add Shot Mark 2]/  
[Del. Shot Mark 2]  
Adds or deletes a # mark.  
4
[Fewer Index Pics]  
[More Index Pics]  
Decreases the number of thumbnails that are displayed.  
Increases the number of thumbnails that are displayed.  
Ü
4
Ü
Switches to playback of a clip with playback paused on  
the selected frame.  
[Pause]  
Ü
Ü
[Set Index Picture]  
Sets the thumbnail used in the clip index screen.  
1
2
3
4
Includes also the [Shot Mark 1] and [Shot Mark 2] index screens.  
[$ Mark] index screen only.  
[% Mark] index screen only.  
[Expand Clip] index screen only.  
Using the Clip Menu  
1 Select a clip and then press SET.  
• The clip menu appears. Available functions depend on the index screen and which functions are enabled.  
   
Clip Operations  
2 Select the desired function and then press SET.  
• The function is enabled. For some functions, further action may be required. Follow the onscreen directions.  
• Press the CANCEL button instead to return to the clip index screen.  
119  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do  
so may result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not open the cover of the either CF card slot.  
Displaying Clip Information  
Select [Display Clip Info] in the clip menu to display the selected clips information screen ([Clip Info] screen).  
Push the joystick left/right to switch to the previous/next clip. When you are finished, press the CANCEL button  
to return to the clip index screen.  
4
5 6  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Thumbnail of the selected clip  
Thumbnail of the previous clip  
Thumbnail of the next clip  
11 Frame rate (A 55)  
For slow & fast motion recording mode, the  
shooting and playback frame rates will be  
displayed.  
Shot mark (A 90, 124)  
Special recording mode (A 93)  
Currently selected CF card slot (A 43)  
Clip number / Total number of clips  
Recording date and time  
12 $ mark / % mark (A 91, 120)  
13 Embedded custom picture file (A 91)  
14 Time code of the clip thumbnail  
15 Time code of the first frame in clip  
16 Time code of the last frame in clip  
17 Clip duration  
Clip name (A 51)  
10 Bit rate and resolution (A 55)  
Displaying the Lens Information and User Memo  
From the [Clip Info] screen, push the joystick up or turn the SELECT dial up to display the [Lens & Q] screen.  
In this screen you can check details about the lens used to record the clip. If the clip has an embedded user  
memo, you will see the user memo content in this screen as well. Push the joystick down or turn the SELECT  
dial down to return to the [Clip Info] screen.  
   
Clip Operations  
Displaying Custom Picture Settings  
When displaying the [Clip Info] screen of a clip that has a custom picture file recorded with it, push the joystick  
down or turn the SELECT dial down to display the first of three screens with the clips custom picture settings  
([/ Data 1/3] screen). Push the joystick down or turn the SELECT dial down to switch the [/ Data 2/3] screen  
J [/ Data 3/3] screen J [Lens & Q] screen J [Clip Info] screen.  
120  
Adding $ Marks or % Marks  
If you add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to a clip, you can later display an index screen that shows only  
the clips with an $ mark or only the clips with a % mark. Furthermore, you cannot delete clips with an $ mark  
so you can use it to protect important clips.  
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark during Playback  
To add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to a clip during playback or playback pause, you must first set an  
assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] in advance.  
1 Set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 99).  
To add both types of clip marks (to different clips), set one assignable button to [Add $ Mark] and another  
assignable button to [Add % Mark].  
2 During playback or playback pause, press the assignable button d the clip mark.  
• A message indicating the clip mark will appear and tted climark will be added to the clip.  
• Adding a clip mark to a clip during playback wause layback.  
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark frm he creen  
1 Select the desired clip and then presSET to opeclip menu.  
2 Select [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Markand tn press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The screen changes back to the clip index screen and an $ mark or % appears next to the selected clips  
thumbnail.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
NOTES  
• A clip cannot have both an $ mark and % mark at the same time. When you add a % mark to a clip with an  
$ mark, the $ mark will be deleted. Similarly, when you add an $ mark to a clip with a % mark, the %  
mark will be deleted.  
Deleting $ Marks or % Marks  
Deleting an $ Mark or % Mark from a Clip  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Delete $ Mark] or [Delete % Mark] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The screen changes back to the clip index screen the selected mark is deleted.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
       
Clip Operations  
Deleting $ Marks from All Clips  
[w Other Functions]  
[Delete All $ Marks]  
1 Open the [Delete All $ Marks] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Delete All $ Marks]  
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
121  
• All $ marks from clips on the selected CF card will be deleted.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the $ marks are being deleted, you can press SET to cancel.  
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Copying Clips  
You can copy clips from one CF card to the other. The copied clips will retain their original name.  
Copying a Single Clip  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Copy Clip] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confithe operation. You can also check the  
available space on both CF cards.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the clip is being copied, you can preo cael.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, pr
• The selected clip is copied to the ther CF cathe screen changes back to the clip index screen.  
Copying All Clips  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Copy All Clips] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Copy All Clips]  
[Clips]  
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• All of the clips on the selected CF card will be copied to the other CF  
card.  
[Copy All Clips]  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the clips are being copied, you can press SET to cancel.  
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Copying All Clips with an $ Mark  
[w Other Functions]  
[Clips]  
1 Open the [Copy $ Clips] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Copy $ Clips]  
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• All of the clips with an $ mark on the selected CF card will be copied  
to the other CF card.  
[Copy $ Clips]  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the clips are being copied, you can press SET to cancel.  
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
         
Clip Operations  
NOTES  
• You cannot copy a clip if either CF card slot cover is open.  
• If a clip is being copied to a card that already has a clip with the same number (the last 4 digits in the clip  
name), then the copied clip will be renamed with the following number.  
122  
Deleting Clips  
You can delete any clip except those with an $ mark. To delete such clips, delete the $ mark beforehand.  
Deleting a Single Clip  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Delete Clip] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the clip is being deleted, the operation cannot be canceled.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Deleting All Clips  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Delete All Clips] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Delete All
[Clips]  
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• All of the clips (except for clips witan $ mare selected CF  
[Delete All Clips]  
card will be deleted.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the oeron.  
• While the clips are being deleted, you can press SET to cancel.  
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Deleting the User Memo and GPS Information  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Delete User Memo] and then press SET.  
• The [Delete User Memo] screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The user memo and GPS information is deleted and the screen changes back to the clip index screen.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
Copying a Custom Picture File Embedded in a Clip  
You can copy the custom picture file embedded in a clip to the camcorder.  
1 Select the desired clip (a clip with the / icon) and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Copy / File] and then press SET.  
           
Clip Operations  
• The [/ Data 1/3] screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a custom picture file slot in the  
camcorder.  
• Alternatively, you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button.  
• You can push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to display the [/ Data 2/3] and [/ Data 3/3]  
screens.  
123  
3 Push the joystick left/right to select the desired file slot and then press SET.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The custom picture file already in the selected file slot will be overwritten.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
NOTES  
• You cannot copy the custom picture file to a file slot with a protected file.  
• By default, file slots [C8] and [C9] are protected.  
Displaying an Index Screen of Shot Marks  
After you add shot marks to a clip, you can display an index scren tat contains all the frames in a clip with  
either shot mark, only the " mark or only the # mark. Whyou pback a clip from this index screen,  
playback will start from the frame indicated by the shot u can so perform other operations from this  
index screen, such as adding and deleting shot maks.  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SEn thclip menu.  
2 Select [Shot Mark] and then preSET.  
• The [Shot Mark] index screen appars, whih contains all the frames with shot marks in the clip. Select  
instead [Shot Mark 1] to display an idex reen only of the frames with the " mark or [Shot Mark 2] to  
display an index screen only of the frames with the # mark.  
• The time code under the thumbnail indicates the time code of the frame with the shot mark.  
• Press the INDEX button or CANCEL button to return to the clip index screen.  
Time code of the  
frame with the  
shot mark  
NOTES  
• After you finish playing back a clip from this index screen, the index screen that was open before the [Shot  
Mark] index screen will appear.  
   
Clip Operations  
Displaying a Frame Index Screen of a Single Clip  
You can display an index screen of a single clip broken down as frames at fixed intervals. This is useful when you  
have a long clip or wish to play back a clip from a certain point. You can change how many thumbnails are  
displayed. You can also perform other operations from this index screen, such as adding and deleting shot  
marks.  
124  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Expand Clip] and then press SET.  
• The [Expand Clip] index screen appears, which shows thumbnails of frames taken from the clip at fixed  
intervals. The time code under the thumbnail indicates the time code of the frame.  
• You can change the fixed interval between frames by showing more or fewer thumbnails. To show more  
thumbnails, open the clip menu and select [More Index Pics] and then press SET. To show fewer  
thumbnails, select [Fewer Index Pics] and then press SET.  
• Press the INDEX button or CANCEL button to return to the clip index screen.  
Thumbnail icon:  
Indicates the frame  
used as the clip  
thumbnail in the clip  
index screen.  
Time code of the  
displayed frame  
NOTES  
• After you finish playing back a clip from ts idex screen, the index screen that was open before the [Expand  
Clip] index screen will appear.  
Adding Shot Marks  
You can add shot marks (", # or both) to shots in a clip you want to set apart. Later, you can display an index  
screen that shows only the clips with a " mark, only the clips with a # mark, or only clips with either shot mark.  
Adding Shot Marks during Playback  
To add an " mark or # mark to a clip during playback or playback pause, you must first set an assignable  
button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] in advance.  
1 Set an assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] (A 99).  
2 During playback or playback pause, press the assignable button at the point in the clip to add the  
shot mark.  
• A message indicating the shot mark appears on the screen and the shot mark is added to the clip.  
• Adding a shot mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback.  
Adding Shot Marks from the Index Screen  
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.  
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
           
Clip Operations  
3 Select [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The screen changes back to the previous index screen and the selected shot mark appears next to the  
selected clips thumbnail.  
125  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
NOTES  
• Up to 100 shot marks (" and # marks combined) can be added to a single clip.  
• There may be up to a 0.5 second delay from when you press the button to when the camcorder adds the shot  
mark.  
Deleting Shot Marks  
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.  
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
3 Select [Del. Shot Mark 1] or [Del. Shot Mark 2] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confithe operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The selected mark is deleted and the screen changto the revious index screen.  
• If a frame has no shot marks, it will no longer ear i[Shot Mark] index screen.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the opera
Changing a Clip’s Thumbnail  
You can change the thumbnail that appears in the clip index screen to a thumbnail of a frame that appears in the  
[Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.  
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.  
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
3 Select [Set Index Picture] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The selected frame is set as the thumbnail and the screen changes back to the previous index screen. R  
appears next to the thumbnail of the selected frame.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
NOTES  
• When playing back a clip from the clip index screen, playback will start from the beginning of the clip,  
regardless of the thumbnail.  
       
Clip Operations  
126  
External Connections  
6
127  
Video Output Configuration  
The video signal output from the HD/SD SDI, HDMI OUT and SYNC OUT terminals depends on the clips video  
configuration, the capability of the external monitor (for video output from the HDMI OUT terminal) and on various  
menu settings.  
Operating modes:  
Video Output Configuration by Terminal  
Refer to the following table for the video output configuration from each terminal. If necessary, you can  
superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor (A 130).  
Video Output Configuration by Terminal  
Terminal J  
Video configuration L  
1, 2  
2, 3  
4
HD/SD SDI  
HDMI OUT  
SYNC OUT  
Type of  
recording  
Resolution (vertical)/Frame rate  
HD outp
SD O
HD output  
SD output  
HD Output  
SD Output  
1080/24.00P  
720/24.00P  
1080/6
720/60.0
1080/60.00i  
720/60.00P  
1080/60.00i  
720/60.00P  
24.00P  
1080/59.94i  
1080/29.97P  
1/59.94i 480/59.94i 1080/59.94i 480/59.94P 1080/59.94i 480/59.94i  
720/59.94P 480/59.94i 720/59.94P 480/59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94i  
1080/23.98P  
1080/slow or fast motion  
720/59.94P  
NTSC  
720/29.97P  
720/23.98P  
720/slow or fast motion  
1080/50.00i  
1080/25.00P  
1080/50.00i 576/50.00i 1080/50.00i 576/50.00P 1080/50.00i 576/50.00i  
720/50.00P 576/50.00i 720/50.00P 576/50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00i  
1080/slow or fast motion  
720/50.00P  
PAL  
720/25.00P  
720/slow or fast motion  
1
2
Set [¢ Video Setup] > [SDI Output] to [HD], [SD] or [Off].  
When you set [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [HD Output] (under [Zebra]) to [On], you can display zebra patterns on an external  
monitor. (HD output only. During SD output the zebra pattern will not be output.)  
Video output will automatically switch to HD or SD, depending on the capability of the external monitor.  
Set [¢ Video Setup] > [SYNC Output] to [HD-Y] (HD component video, luminance signal) or [Composite] (SD analog  
composite signal).  
When the camcorder is connected via HDMI OUT terminal to an external monitor, the video signal output from the HD/SD SDI  
terminal will be the same as that from the HDMI OUT terminal.  
3
4
5
       
Connecting to an External Monitor  
Connecting to an External Monitor  
When you connect the camcorder to an external monitor for recording or playback, use the terminal on  
camcorder that matches the one you wish to use on the monitor. Then, select the video signal output  
configuration (A 127). The camcorder can output video from all of the video output terminals simultaneously.  
128  
Operating modes:  
Connection Diagram  
When you connect the camcorder to an external monitor using the SYNC OUT terminal, use headphones to  
monitor the sound (A 84).  
We recommend that you power the camcorder from a household power outlet using the compact power adapter.  
SYNC OUT  
terminal  
BNC cable  
(commercially  
available)  
HDMI OUT  
terminal  
HD/SD SDI  
terminal  
HDMI cable  
(commercially  
available)  
BNC cable  
(commercially  
available)  
SDI IN  
HDMI IN  
VIDEO IN or COMPONENT IN (Y)  
     
Connecting to an External Monitor  
Using the HD/SD SDI Terminal  
[¢ Video Setup]  
[SDI Output]  
[HD]  
The digital signal output from the HD/SD SDI terminal includes the video  
signal, audio signal and time code signal. If necessary, perform the  
following procedure to change the output to HD or SD*. Turning the  
output off will conserve the camcorders power.  
129  
* Not available for 24.00P recordings.  
1 Open the [SDI Output] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [SDI Output]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you selected [SD], you can select the SD output method (A 130).  
NOTES  
• If necessary, you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor  
(A 130).  
Using the HDMI OUT Terminal  
The HDMITM OUT terminal also offers a digital connection and ouputboth a video and audio signal. The output  
signal will automatically switch to HD or SD* depending on e capy of the external monitor.  
* Not available for 24.00P recordings.  
NOTES  
• Correct operation cannot be guaranteed wheing te camcorder to DVI monitors.  
• Video may not be output correctly pending oonitor. In such case, use another terminal.  
• If necessary, you can superimpose tonscren displays on the video displayed on the external monitor  
(A 130).  
• You can select the SD output method (A 130).  
Using the SYNC OUT Terminal  
[¢ Video Setup]  
In addition to its function as a synchronization signal output terminal, you  
can use the SYNC OUT terminal also as a terminal for analog video signal  
output. You can output an HD component video luminance signal or a  
[SYNC Output]  
down-converted SD composite video signal*.  
* Not available for 24.00P recordings.  
[Composite]  
1 Open the [SYNC Output] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [SYNC Output]  
2 Select [HD-Y] or [Composite] and then press SET.  
• If you selected [HD-Y] (HD component video, luminance signal), no more settings are necessary. If you  
selected [Composite] (SD analog composite signal), you can select the SD output method with the following  
procedure.  
NOTES  
• When you play back a clip on a monitor with a 4:3 aspect ratio, the monitor will switch automatically to  
widescreen mode if it is compatible with the Video ID-1 or WSS system.  
• If necessary, you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor  
(A 130).  
           
Connecting to an External Monitor  
SD Output  
[¢ Video Setup]  
[SD Output]  
When HD video (16:9 aspect ratio) is converted and output as SD video  
(4:3 aspect ratio), you can choose how it appears on the external monitor.  
130  
1 Open the [SD Output] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [SD Output]  
[Letterbox]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
Options  
[Squeeze]:  
The image is squeezed from the left and right so that the entire image fits within the screen. The image  
will appear normal if the external monitor also has a 16:9 aspect ratio.  
[Letterbox]: The 16:9 aspect ratio is maintained but black letterbox bars are added to the top and bottom of the  
image.  
[Side Crop]: The left and right sides of the image are cropped so that the central part of the image fits within the  
screen.  
Original image (16:9)  
[Squeeze] setting  
[Letterb] setting  
[Side Crop] setting  
Superimposing Onscreen Displays to ar an  
External Monitor  
[¢ Video Setup]  
You can choose to superimpose onscren displayvideo output  
from the HD/SD SDI terminal, HDMI OUterminal or SYNC OUT terminal.  
Doing so will display the onscreen displaon aexternal monitor. You  
must set this function separately for HD and SD output. This setting will  
not affect your recordings.  
[HD Onscreen Disp.]  
[SD Onscreen Disp.]  
[Off]  
1 Open the [HD Onscreen Disp.] or [SD Onscreen Disp.] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [HD Onscreen Disp.] or [SD Onscreen Disp.]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
T appears on the upper right of the screen (when [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 2] >  
[Output Display] is set to [On]).  
NOTES  
• Onscreen displays will not appear on an external monitor for SD output if [¢ Video Setup] > [SD Output] is  
set to [Side Crop].  
• If you set an assignable button to [Onscreen Display] (A 99), you can press the button to turns on and off the  
superimposing of onscreen displays on video output from the camcorders terminals (simultaneously for HD  
and SD video).  
       
Audio Output  
Audio Output  
The camcorder can output audio from the HD/SD SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal or × (headphone) terminal.  
When audio is output from the × (headphone) terminal, you can configure settings such as the output channel.  
131  
Embedded Audio  
Embedded audio refers to the superimposing of the audio signal along with the video signal being output from  
the HD/SD SDI terminal. If you set the [¢ Video Setup] > [SDI Output] setting to [HD] or [SD] (A 129), the  
camcorder will automatically embed audio.  
Operating modes:  
Selecting the Audio Channel  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
You can select the audio channel that is output from the × (headphone)  
terminal.  
[Audio Output]  
Operating modes:  
[Channel]  
1 Open the [Channel] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] > [Ch
[CH1/CH2]  
2 Select the desired option and thepess
Options  
[CH1/CH2]: Audio from CH1 is output fm the ft audio channel and audio from CH2 is output from the right audio  
channel.  
[CH1/CH1]: Audio from CH1 is output from both the left and right audio channels.  
[CH2/CH2]: Audio from CH2 is output from both the left and right audio channels.  
[All/All]:  
Audio from CH1 and CH2 is mixed and output from both the left and right audio channels.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [Audio Output CH] (A 99), you can press the button to change the audio  
channel directly.  
           
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Use the software on the supplied Canon XF Utilities CD-ROM to transfer clips in the camcorder to a computer  
to save them. The CD-ROM contains the following.  
132  
Canon XF Utility: Browser for transferring clips to a computer, playing back and checking video,  
and managing clips.  
Plugins for non-linear editing (NLE) software: The plugins allow you to transfer clips from a computer  
or a CF card (connected via USB reader to a computer) to the NLE software. The following plugins  
are included.  
- Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access (for computers running Windows or Mac OS)  
- Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro (for computers running Mac OS)  
The instruction manual for each module provides more details. Refer to Viewing the Software Instruction  
Manuals (A 138) for details on accessing the manuals. Refer to Web sites such as your local Canon Web site  
for the latest information on software.  
Operating modes:  
System Requirements  
Canon XF Utility  
1
WinowP , 
2
OS  
Wiows Vista , SP
Mac OS X v10.5, 10.6 or 10.7  
Windows with or thout SP1  
Intel® Core (IntelCore Duo, 2.66 GHz  
recommended); SSE2 compatible  
CPU  
Intel® CPU (Intel® Core 2 Duo, 2.66 GHz recommended)  
RAM  
1 GB (2 GB for Windows 7, 64-bit version)  
Installation: 80 MB  
1024 x 768 resolution, 16-bit color (high color)  
Available hard disk space  
Display  
1024 x 768 resolution, 32,000 colors  
1
2
32-bit version only.  
32-bit and 64-bit versions.  
Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access  
Media Composer 4.05 / 5.0 / 5.5 (Windows and Mac OS)  
NewsCutter 8.0.5 / 9.0 / 9.5 (Windows only)  
Required application  
Refer to the applications official home page for the applications system requirements.  
Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro  
Required application  
Final Cut Pro 6.0.6 / 7.0.0 to 7.0.3  
Refer to the applications official home page for the applications system requirements.  
NOTES  
• Even if your computer meets the system requirements, proper operation of the software cannot be  
guaranteed.  
     
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Installing and Uninstalling Canon XF Utility (Windows)  
Installing Canon XF Utility  
133  
Perform the following procedure to install the Canon XF Utility software. Note that you can select the language  
used for the installation process from English, French, Spanish, Italian or German (available languages depend  
on the region you select). However, only the English version of the software is included in the supplied Canon XF  
Utilities CD-ROM. After installing this version, you can download language packs that will change the user  
interface (menus, messages, etc.) to other languages. For more details, visit your local Canon Web site.  
1 Insert the Canon XF Utilities CD-ROM into the computer.  
• The installation screen appears. If it does not, follow the steps below.  
- Windows 7 and Windows Vista: When the AutoPlay window appears, select Run SETUP.EXE.  
- Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows XP: Open Computer (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or My  
Computer (Windows XP) and double-click the icon of the drive that contains the CD-ROM.  
2 Select your region.  
• If you selected [Asia] or [Oceania], skip to step 4.  
3 Select the language to be displayed during installation.  
4 Select an installation method and then click [OK].  
• If you selected the [Easy Installation] installation method, skip to step 7.  
 
Saving Clips to a Computer  
5 Select the software to install and the destination folder. Then, click [Next].  
134  
6 Click [Install].  
7 Read the license agreement and click Ye] to nstallation.  
• If you do not select [Yes], you cant install the are.  
• When the installation has complete[Instation has completed successfully.] appears.  
• You can click [Cancel] to cancel the opion.  
8 Click [Next] and then click [Finish].  
9 Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.  
Uninstalling Canon XF Utility  
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Uninstall Canon XF  
Utility.  
• A confirmation screen appears.  
2 Click [Yes] to begin the uninstalling the software.  
• When the software has been uninstalled, [The software has been successfully uninstalled] appears.  
3 Click [OK].  
Uninstalling Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access  
1 In the Control Panel, open Programs and Features* (Windows 7/Windows Vista) or Add or Remove  
Programs (Windows XP).  
• A list of installed programs appears.  
2 Select Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access.  
3 Click Uninstall or Uninstall/Change (Windows 7/Windows Vista) or Change/Remove (Windows XP).  
4 Follow the onscreen instructions.  
* This may be Add or Remove Programs depending on how the Control Panel is displayed.  
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Uninstalling Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder  
1 In the Control Panel, open Programs and Features* (Windows 7/Windows Vista) or Add or Remove  
Programs (Windows XP).  
• A list of installed programs appears.  
135  
2 Select Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder.  
3 Click Uninstall or Uninstall/Change (Windows 7/Windows Vista) or Change/Remove (Windows XP).  
4 Follow the onscreen instructions.  
* This may be Add or Remove Programs depending on how the Control Panel is displayed.  
Uninstalling the Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instructions  
1 From the Start menu, open All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access >  
Uninstall Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual.  
2 When the confirmation screen appears, click [Yes] and then click [OK].  
Installing and Uninstalling Canon XF Utility (Mac OS)  
Installing Canon XF Utility  
1 Insert the Canon XF Utilities CD-ROM into the compu
2 Open the Finder, click CanonXFxxM under DECES isidebar and double-click MasterInstaller.  
• The “xx” in the CD-ROMs name stands foon umber.  
• Mac OS X v10.5 or 10.6: The CD-Os icear on the desktop. You can double click the icon and  
then double-click MasterInstalle
• The installation screen appears.  
3 Select your region.  
 
Saving Clips to a Computer  
4 Click [Install].  
136  
5 Select the installation method and then click [Next].  
6 Read the license agreement and clic[Agree].  
• If you do not select [Agree], you cant insll the software.  
• If you selected the [Easy Installation] installation method, skip to step 8.  
7 Select the software to install and then click [Next].  
Saving Clips to a Computer  
8 Click [Next] to begin the installation.  
137  
• When the installation has completed, [Installation has finished.] appears.  
9 Click [Finish] and then remove the CD-ROM from the computer.  
Uninstalling the Software  
1 From Applications, open Canon Utilities.  
2 Drag and drop Canon XF Utility to Trash.  
Uninstalling Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro  
Drag and drop the following file to Trash.  
/Library/Application Support/ProApps/MIO/Rs/CnonXF.RADPlug  
Uninstalling Canon XF Plugin foAvid Medccess  
Drag and drop the following file to Tras
/Library/Application Support/Avid/AVX2_Plug-ins/AMA/MVP_CanonXF.avx  
Uninstalling Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder  
Drag and drop the following file to Trash.  
/Library/QuickTime/XFMpeg2Dec.component  
Uninstalling the Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro Instructions  
1 From Applications, open Canon Utilities.  
2 Drag and drop Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro to Trash.  
Uninstalling the Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instructions  
1 From Applications, open Canon Utilities.  
2 Drag and drop Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access to Trash.  
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals  
For details on using the software, refer to the instruction manual (PDF file) of each module. The instruction  
manuals are installed with the software. For computers running Windows, Adobe® Reader® is required.  
138  
Viewing the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual  
Windows:  
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Canon XF Utility  
Instruction Manual.  
2 Select the language of the instruction manual to view.  
Mac OS:  
1 From Applications, open Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Manual.  
2 Open the folder of the language and double-click the PDF file.  
You can also view the instruction manual by starting the Canon XF Utility software and then selecting [Help] >  
[View instruction manual].  
Viewing the Plugin Instructions  
Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instructions (Windows
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Uti> Cann XF Plugin for Avid Media Access >  
Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instruction l.  
2 Select the desired language.  
Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro Instuctns
1 From Applications, open Canon Utties > CanoF Plugin for Final Cut Pro > Manual.  
2 Open the folder of the language and duble-cck the PDF file.  
Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instructions (Mac OS):  
1 From Applications, open Canon Utilities > Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access > Manual.  
2 Open the folder of the language and double-click the PDF file.  
   
Photos  
7
139  
Taking Photos  
You can take photos when the camcorder is in  
camcorder is in  
mode or you can capture a photo from a clip when the  
mode. Photos are saved onto the SD card. In  
mode, photo size is 1920x1080*. In  
mode, photo size depends on the resolution setting of the clip that the photo is captured from. If the clip  
is 1920x1080 or 1440x1080, the photo size is 1920x1080. If the clip is 1280x720, the photo size is 1280x720.  
* At this size, the camcorder can save approximately 670 photos on a 1 GB SD card.  
Taking Photos in CAMERA Mode  
You can take a photo while the camcorder is recording a clip or is in record pause mode. If a custom picture file  
is selected in advance, it will be recorded with the photo (A 101). To take a photo, set an assignable button to  
[Photo] in advance.  
Operating modes:  
1 Set an assignable button to [Photo] (A 99).  
2 Press the assignable button to take a photo
* and the number of available photos aphe uper right of the screen.  
• If a custom picture file is selected, wbe with the photo.  
• The SD card access indicator wilash as the is being recorded.  
NOTES  
• Photo recording is disabled while Wi-Fi communication is turned on ([w Other Functions] > [Wi-Fi Remote]  
> [Select] is set to a setting other than [Off]).  
Capturing Photos in MEDIA Mode  
You can capture a photo from a clip during playback pause. To capture a photo, set an assignable button to  
[Photo] in advance.  
Operating modes:  
1 Set an assignable button to [Photo] (A 99).  
2 Select the desired clip and press the Ò button to start playback.  
3 Pause the playback at the point you want to capture.  
4 Press the assignable button to capture a photo.  
• The screen will momentarily turn black as if a camera shutter had released.  
* and the number of available photos appear on the upper right of the screen.  
• The SD card access indicator will flash as the photo is being recorded.  
5 Press the Ñ button to stop playback.  
         
Taking Photos  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing. Failure to do so may result in  
permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not remove the SD card.  
140  
NOTES  
• If the LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent writing, you will not be able to record a photo. Change the  
position of the LOCK switch in advance.  
• Even if [Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Scan Reverse Rec] is set to a setting other than [Off],  
photos will not be inverted.  
Photo Playback  
Photo Playback  
You can view the photos that you took with the camcorder.  
Operating modes:  
141  
Displaying the [Photos] Index Screen  
Display the [Photos] index screen to view photos.  
1 Set the Q switch to MEDIA.  
• The camcorder switches to  
appears.  
mode and the clip index screen  
2 Press the INDEX button.  
• The index screen selection menu appears.  
3 Select [Photo Index] and then press SET.  
• The [Photos] index screen appears.  
• After you are finished viewing photos, press the INDEX button to  
return to the clip index screen.  
Viewing Photos  
1 Move the orange selection framto the deoto.  
2 Press the Ò button to view thphoto
• The photo playback screen appears he selected photo is  
displayed.  
• Use the Ú/Ù buttons or push the joystick left/right to switch to  
the previous/next photo.  
• Press the DISP. button to hide/show the onscreen displays.  
• Press the Ñ button to return to the [Photos] index screen.  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing. Failure to do so may result in  
permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not remove the SD card.  
NOTES  
• The following photos may not be displayed correctly.  
- Photos not recorded with this camcorder.  
- Photos created or edited on a computer.  
- Photos whose file names have been changed.  
       
Photo Operations  
Photo Operations  
You can use the photo menu to protect or unprotect a photo, delete a photo, or copy a custom picture file  
embedded in a photo. You can display the photo menu from the [Photos] index screen or photo playback  
screen.  
142  
Using the Photo Menu  
1 From the [Photos] index screen, select a photo and then press SET.  
• If you are viewing a photo, simply press SET.  
• The photo menu appears. Available functions depend on the photos settings.  
2 Select the desired function and then press SET.  
Deleting Photos  
You can delete a photo you no longer need. When you do so, however, the custom picture file embedded in it  
will also be deleted. Photos can be deleted one at a time from the pho playback screen or [Photos] index  
screen.  
Operating modes:  
Deleting a Photo from the Playback Scr
1 Display the photo to be deleted (A 41).  
2 Press SET to open the photo menu.  
3 Select [Delete] and then press SET.  
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• The selected photo is deleted and the next photo is displayed.  
• If a custom picture file is embedded in the photo, it is also deleted.  
5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Deleting a Photo from the Index Screen  
1 Open the [Photos] Index Screen (A 141).  
2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo to be deleted.  
3 Press SET to open the photo menu.  
4 Select [Delete] and then press SET.  
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.  
5 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• The selected photo is deleted.  
• If a custom picture file is embedded in the photo, it is also deleted.  
6 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
       
Photo Operations  
Deleting All Photos  
[w Other Functions]  
[Delete All Photos]  
1 Open the [Delete All Photos] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Delete All Photos]  
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
143  
• All of the photos on the SD card, except for protected ones, will be  
deleted.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the photos are being deleted, you can press SET to cancel.  
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
IMPORTANT  
• Be careful when deleting photos. Deleted photos cannot be recovered.  
Protecting Photos  
You can protect photos to prevent accidental erasure. The custom picture file embedded in such a photo is also  
protected. Photos can be protected from the photo playback screen or [Photos] index screen.  
Operating modes:  
Protecting a Photo from the Playback Sn  
1 Display the photo to be protected (A 141).  
2 Press SET to open the photo menu
3 Select [Protect] and then press SET
To remove protection settings from protted photo, select [Unprotect] instead.  
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• The selected photo is protected and i appears on the lower left of the screen.  
• If a custom picture file is embedded in the photo, it is also protected.  
Protecting a Photo from the Index Screen  
1 Open the [Photos] Index Screen (A 141).  
2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo to be protected.  
3 Press SET to open the photo menu.  
4 Select [Protect] and then press SET.  
To remove protection settings from a protected photo, select [Unprotect] instead.  
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.  
5 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The selected photo is protected and i appears next to the photos thumbnail.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• If a custom picture file is embedded in the photo, it is also protected.  
     
Photo Operations  
IMPORTANT  
• Initializing an SD card will permanently erase all the data it contains, including protected photos and custom  
picture files.  
144  
Copying Custom Picture Files  
You can copy to the camcorder a custom picture file embedded in a photo. Custom picture files can be copied  
from the photo playback screen or [Photos] index screen.  
Operating modes:  
Copying a File from the Playback Screen  
1 Display the photo with the custom picture file to be copied (A 141).  
2 Press SET to open the photo menu.  
3 Select [Copy / File] and then press SET.  
• The [/ Data 1/3] screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a file slot in the camcorder.  
• Alternatively, you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button.  
You can push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to iay the [/ Data 2/3] and [/ Data 3/3]  
screens.  
4 Push the joystick left/right to select the desired file slot an press ET.  
5 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The custom picture file embedded in te selto is copied, overwriting the file in that slot.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel te operation
6 When the confirmation message apprs, pres SET.  
Copying a File from the Index Screen  
1 Open the [Photos] Index Screen (A 141).  
2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo with the custom picture file to be copied.  
3 Press SET to open the photo menu.  
4 Select [Copy / File] and then press SET.  
• The [/ Data 1/3] screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a file slot in the camcorder.  
• Alternatively, you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button.  
You can push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to display the [/ Data 2/3] and [/ Data 3/3]  
screens.  
5 Push the joystick left/right to select the desired file slot and then press SET.  
6 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The custom picture file embedded in the selected photo is copied, overwriting the file in that slot.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
7 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
NOTES  
• You cannot copy the custom picture file to a file slot with a protected file.  
• By default, file slots [C8] and [C9] are protected.  
   
Photo Operations  
Photo Numbering  
[w Other Functions]  
Photos are automatically assigned consecutive numbers from 0101 to  
9900, and stored on the SD card in folders containing up to 100 photos.  
Folders are numbered from 101 to 998. You can select the photo  
numbering method to be used.  
[Photo Numbering]  
[Continu.]  
145  
The photo number indicates the name and location of the file on the SD  
card. For example, a photo numbered 101-0107 is located in the  
“DCIM\101CANON” folder as the file “IMG_0107.jpg”.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Photo Numbering] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Photo Numbering]  
2 Select the desired option and the press SET.  
Options  
[Reset]:  
Photo numbers will restart from 101-0101 every time you insert a new SD card. If an SD card already  
contains photos, photo numbers will continue from the number following that of the last photo on the SD  
card.  
[Continu.]: Photo numbers will continue from the number following thaof the last photo recorded with the  
camcorder.  
NOTES  
• If you select [Continu.] and the SD card you inady ontains a photo with a larger number, a new photo  
will be assigned a number one higher than thst oto on the SD card.  
• We recommend using the [Continu.setting.  
   
Photo Operations  
146  
Additional Information  
8
147  
Menu Options  
For details about how to select an item, refer to Using the Menus (A 29). For details about each function, see  
the reference page. Menu items without a reference page are explained after the tables. Setting options in  
boldface indicate default values. Menu items not available appear grayed out.  
To skip directly to the page of a specific menu:  
[~ Camera Setup] menu  
[¡ Audio Setup] menu  
[¢ Video Setup] menu  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] menu  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] menu  
[w Other Functions] menu  
[
My Menu] customized menu  
[~ Camera Setup] menu (  
mode only)  
Menu item  
Submenu  
Setting options  
A
[ISO/Gain]  
[Select]  
[ISO Increment]  
[ISO], [
[top], [1]  
, [Fi]  
[Gain]  
# [Iris]  
[Iris Increment]  
[Zoom-Iris Corre.]  
[Mode]  
[1/3 stop], [Fine]  
[]  
[Shutter]  
[Speed], [Angle], [Clear Scan], [Slow], [Off]  
[1/3 stop], [1/4 stop]  
[On], [Off]  
[Shutter Increment]  
[/ CINEMA Locked]  
[ABB]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Color Bars]  
[Enable]  
[Type]  
[On], [Off]  
[SMPTE], [EBU], [ARIB]  
[On], [Off]  
# [Periph. Illum. Corr.]  
       
Menu Options  
[¡ Audio Setup] menu  
Menu item  
Submenu  
[XLR Rec Channel]  
[XLR1 Mic Trimming]  
[XLR2 Mic Trimming]  
[XLR1 Mic Att.]  
Setting options  
[CH1], [CH1/CH2]  
A
[Audio Input]  
Ü
Ü
[+12 dB], [+6 dB], [0 dB], [-6 dB], [-12 dB]  
148  
[On], [Off]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
[XLR2 Mic Att.]  
[XLR ALC Link]  
[Linked], [Separated]  
[Limiter]  
[On], [Off]  
82,  
[1 kHz Tone]  
[MIC Mode]  
[MIC Level]  
[-12 dB], [-18 dB], [-20 dB], [Off]  
[Automatic], [Manual]  
0 to 99 (50)  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[MIC Att.]  
[On], [Off]  
[Audio Output]  
[Channel]  
[CH1/CH2], [CH1/CH1], [CH2/CH2], [All/All]  
[Off], 1 to 15 (8)  
Ü*  
Ü*  
[Headphone Volume]  
* Not available in the [Photos] index screen.  
[¢ Video Setup] menu  
Menu item  
options  
A
[SDI Output]  
[HD], [SD]*, [Off]  
[SYNC Output]  
[HD-Y], [HD Sync], [Blk Burst]e]*, ff]  
[HD Onscreen Disp.]  
[SD Onscreen Disp.]*  
[SD Output]*  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Squeeze], [Letterbox], e Crop]  
* Not available for 24.00P recordings.  
   
Menu Options  
[£ LCD/VF Setup] menu  
Menu item  
Submenu  
[Brightness]  
Setting options  
A
[LCD Setup]  
-99 to 99 ( 0)  
-99 to 99 ( 0)  
-20 to 20 ( 0)  
1 to 4 (2)  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Contrast]  
[Color]  
149  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Sharpness]  
[Backlight]  
[Brightness]  
[Contrast]  
[Color]  
[Normal], [Bright]  
-99 to 99 ( 0)  
[VF Setup]  
-99 to 99 ( 0)  
-20 to 20 ( 0)  
[Sharpness]  
[Backlight]  
1 to 4 (2)  
[Normal], [Bright]  
[On], [Off]  
[LCD/VF B&W]  
[LCD/VF Simul.]  
[View Assist.]  
[Peaking]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Select]  
[Peaking 1], [Peaking 2]  
[White], [Red], [Yellow], ue]  
[Off], 1 to 15 (8)  
1 to 4 (2
[Peaking 1]  
[Color]  
[Gain]  
[Frequency]  
[Color]  
[Peaking 2]  
[White], [Rlow], [Blu
o 15 5)  
[Gain]  
[Frequency]  
[Zebra]  
[Select]  
[Zebra 1], [Zebra 2], [Zebra 1&2]  
[Zebra 1 Level]  
[70 5%], [75 5%], [80 5%], [85 5%],  
[90 5%], [95 5%]  
Ü
Ü
[Zebra 2 Level]  
[70%], [75%], [80%], [85%], [90%], [95%],  
[100%]  
[HD Output]  
[Markers]  
[On], [Off]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Enable]  
[On], [Off]  
[Center]  
[White], [Gray], [Off]  
[White], [Gray], [Off]  
[White], [Gray], [Off]  
[White], [Gray], [Off]  
[80%], [90%], [92.5%], [95%]  
[White], [Gray], [Off]  
[Horizontal]  
[Grid]  
[Safety Zone]  
[Safety Zone Area]  
[Aspect Marker]  
[Aspect Ratio]  
[4:3], [13:9], [14:9], [1.66:1], [1.75:1],  
[1.85:1], [2.35:1]  
Ü
[Audio Level]  
[On], [Off]  
Ü*  
 
Menu Options  
Menu item  
[Custom Display 1]  
Submenu  
[Custom Picture]  
Setting options  
A
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
# [Focal Length]  
[ND Filter]  
150  
[Key Lock]  
[White Balance]  
# [Iris]  
[ISO/Gain]  
[Shutter]  
[Peaking]  
[Magnification]  
[View Assist.]  
[Remaining Battery]  
[Remaining Rec Time]  
[Rec Mode]  
[Custom Display 2]  
[Warning], [Normal], [Off]  
[Warning], [Normal], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Genlock]  
[On], [Off]  
[Time Code]  
[On], [Off]  
[Interval Counter]  
[SD Card Status]  
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[Frame Rate]  
[Character Rec]  
[Output Display]  
[SDI Rec Comma
[User Memo]  
[User Bit]  
[On], [Off]  
[Warning], [Normal], f]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Audio Output CH]  
[Audio Level]  
[Wi-Fi]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Date/Time]  
[Date/Time], [Time], [Date], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Metadata Display]  
[Date/Time]  
Ü*  
Ü*  
[Camera Data]  
[On], [Off]  
* Not available in the [Photos] index screen.  
[Audio Level]: Displays the audio level meter when set to [On].  
[Custom Display 1] settings  
[Custom Picture]: Displays the custom picture icon (/) when set to [On], indicating that a custom picture  
profile will be recorded with a clip.  
# [Focal Length]: Displays the current focal length of an attached EF lens when set to [On].  
[ND Filter]: Displays the ND filter indicator when set to [On].  
[Key Lock]: Displays the key lock icon (C) when set to [On].  
[White Balance]: Displays the white balance indicator when set to [On].  
# [Iris]: Displays the aperture setting when set to [On].  
[ISO/Gain]: Displays the ISO speed or gain setting when set to [On].  
[Shutter]: Displays the shutter speed setting when set to [On].  
 
Menu Options  
[Peaking]: Displays the peaking icon (J or K) when set to [On].  
[Magnification]: Displays the screen magnification icon (^) when set to [On], indicating that the image on  
the screen is being magnified.  
[View Assist.]: Displays the view assistance icon (  
) when set to [On].  
151  
[Custom Display 2] settings  
[Remaining Battery]: Controls when the remaining battery indicator appears.  
[Normal]: Always appears on the screen.  
[Warning]: Appears only when there is a warning.  
[Remaining Rec Time]: Displays the remaining recording time.  
[Normal]: Always appears on the screen.  
[Warning]: Appears only when there is a warning.  
[Rec Mode]: Displays the recording operation indicator ([STBY] in record pause mode, for example) when set  
to [On].  
[Genlock]: Displays the Genlock synchronization icon (U) when set to [On].  
[Time Code]: Displays the time code when set to [On].  
[Interval Counter]: Displays the countdown during interval recording mode when set to [On].  
[SD Card Status]: Controls when the SD card status indicator apprs.  
[Normal]: Always appears on the screen.  
[Warning]: Appears only when there is a warning.  
[Bit rate/Resolution]: Displays the bit rate and resolution set to [On].  
[Frame Rate]: Displays the frame rate when s
[Character Rec]: Displays the charaer recordng icon (S) when set to [On], indicating that the  
onscreen displays will be recorded othe clip.  
[Output Display]: Displays the output splay warning icon (T) when set to [On], indicating that the  
onscreen displays will be output to an external monitor.  
[SDI Rec Command]: Displays the status of the SDI recording command that is being output when [w Other  
Functions] > [SDI Rec Command] is set to [On].  
[User Memo]: Displays the user memo icon (Q) when set to [On], indicating that a user memo will be  
recorded with a clip.  
[User Bit]: Displays the user bit when set to [On].  
[Audio Output CH]: Displays the audio output channel when set to [On].  
[Audio Level]: Displays the audio level indicator and, if activated, the audio peak limiter icon ( ) when set to [On].  
[Wi-Fi]: Displays the Wi-Fi icon (  
) when set to [On].  
[Date/Time]: Displays the date and time when set to [On].  
[Metadata Display]: Displays the date and time of recording and/or the camera data (shutter speed, aperture  
value, gain) during playback.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] menu (  
mode only)  
Menu item  
Submenu  
Setting options  
A
[Time Code]  
[Mode]  
[Run]  
[Preset], [Regen.]  
[Rec Run], [Free Run]  
[DF], [NDF]  
[DF/NDF] *  
[Setting]  
[Set], [Reset]  
[TC In/Out]  
[In], [Out]  
 
Menu Options  
Menu item  
Submenu  
[Rec Mode]  
Setting options  
A
[User Bit]  
[Internal], [External]  
[Fixed], [Pulldown]  
[Output Mode]  
[Type]  
[Setting], [Time], [Date]  
152  
* In the following cases, the time code is set to [NDF] and this setting cannot be changed:  
- [w Other Functions] > [24.00P] is set to [On]  
- [w Other Functions] > [NTSC/PAL] is set to [PAL]  
- [w Other Functions] > [NTSC/PAL] is set to [NTSC] and the frame rate is set to 23.98P  
[¤ User Bit Setup] menu (  
mode only*)  
Menu item  
Setting options  
A
[Output Mode]  
[Fixed], [Pulldown]  
* Not available in the [Photos] index screen.  
[w Other Functions] menu  
Menu item  
Submenu  
Setting options  
A
[Reset]  
[All Settings]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Camera Settings]  
[Assignable Buttons]  
[Save To *]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
1
[Cancel], [OK]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Transfer Menu//]  
[Menu], [
[], [Me]  
d timzones.  
[Load From *]  
[Time Zone]  
New York] or [UTC+01:00  
Cope]  
Ü
Ü
2
[Clock Set]  
[Date/Time]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Date Format]  
[YMD], [YMD/24H], [MDY], [MDY/24H],  
[DMY], [DMY/24H]  
2
1
[WFM (LCD)]  
[Setting]  
[WFM], [VS], [Edge Mon.], [Off]  
[WFM], [VS], [Off]  
Ü
1
1
1
1
1
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Waveform Monitor]  
[Gain]  
[Line], [Line+Spot], [Field], [RGB], [YPbPr]  
[1x], [2x]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Vectorscope]  
[Gain]  
[Spot], [Normal]  
[1x], [5x]  
[Edge Monitor]  
[Gain]  
[Type 1], [Type 2]  
[Off], 1 to 15 (12)  
[Language !]  
[Deutsch], [English], [Español], [Français],  
[Italiano], [Polski], [  
], [  
],  
Ü
Ü
[
]
[Assign Button]  
[1] to [15]  
[1] to [9]  
See footnote 3  
Ü
Ü
1
[Tally Lamp]  
[On], [Off]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Media Access LED]  
[Genlock Adjust.]  
[24.00P]  
[On], [Off]  
Ü
-1023 to +1023 (000)  
[On], [Off]  
1
1
Ü
Ü
2
[NTSC/PAL]  
[NTSC], [PAL]  
[Relay Rec]  
[On], [Off]  
[Double Slot Rec]  
[On], [Off]  
       
Menu Options  
Menu item  
Submenu  
Setting options  
A
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[50 Mbps 1920x1080], [50 Mbps 1280x720],  
[35 Mbps 1920x1080], [35 Mbps 1280x720],  
[25 Mbps 1440x1080]  
Ü
Ü
153  
[Frame Rate]  
When [NTSC/PAL] is set to [NTSC]:  
[59.94i], [59.94P], [29.97P], [23.98P]  
When [NTSC/PAL] is set to [PAL]:  
[50.00i], [50.00P], [25.00P]  
[Special Rec]  
[Interval Rec]  
[Interval Rec], [Frame Rec], [Pre Rec],  
[Slow & Fast Motion], [Off]  
Ü
Ü
[Interval]  
[1 sec] to [10 sec], [15 sec], [20 sec],  
[30 sec], [40 sec], [50 sec],  
[1 min] to [10 min]  
[Rec Frames]  
When [24.00P] is set to [On] or [Frame Rate]  
is set to [23.98P], [29.97P] or [59.94i]:  
1, 3, 6, 9  
Ü
Ü
When [Frame Rate] is set to [25.00P],  
[50.00i], [50.00P] or [59.94P]:  
2, 6, 12  
[Frame Rec]  
[Rec Frames]  
When [24.00P] is set to [On] or [Frame Rate]  
is set to [23.98P], [29.97or [59.94i]:  
1, 3, 6, 9  
When [Fr] is set 25.00P],  
[50.00i], r [59.94P
12  
[Slow & Fast Motion]  
[S&F Frame Rate]  
00P] set to [On] or [NTSC/PAL] is  
C]:  
fps) (30) if [Bit Rate/Resolution] is  
set to an option with 1080 vertical  
resolution  
1 to 60 (fps) (30) if [Bit Rate/Resolution] is  
set to an option with 720 vertical resolution  
When [NTSC/PAL] is set to [PAL]:  
1 to 25 (fps) (25) if [Bit Rate/Resolution] is  
set to an option with 1080 vertical  
resolution  
Ü
Ü
1 to 50 (fps) (25) if [Bit Rate/Resolution] is  
set to an option with 720 vertical resolution  
[Clips]  
[Title Prefix]  
Two characters, each:  
[A] to [Z], [0] to [9] ([AA])  
[Number setting]  
[Delete Last Clip]  
[Copy All Clips]  
[Copy $ Clips]  
[Delete All Clips]  
[Set], [Reset]  
Ü
Ü
[Cancel], [OK]  
4
5
4
5
[Cancel], [OK]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Delete All $ Marks]  
[Rec Review]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Entire Clip], [Last 4 sec]  
[Remote], [SD Card]  
Ü
[Set Metadata]  
[Setting]  
[User Memo]  
[Off], list of user memo files available on the  
SD card  
Ü
[Country Code]  
[Organization]  
[User Code]  
Letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9, plus sign (+),  
minus sign (-), colon (:), space  
 
Menu Options  
Menu item  
Submenu  
Setting options  
A
[SDI Rec Command]  
[Photo Numbering]  
[Delete All Photos]  
[Add / File]  
[On], [Off]  
Ü
Ü
1
6
[Reset], [Continu.]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[On], [Off]  
Ü
Ü
154  
[To Clip]  
Ü
[To Photo]  
[On], [Off]  
[Custom Function]  
[Shockless WB]  
[Control Dial]  
[On], [Off]  
# [Iris], [ISO/Gain], [Off]  
$ [ISO/Gain], [Off]  
[Control Dial Dir.]  
[Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.]  
[SELECT Dial Dir.]  
[F. Assist. B&W]  
[Scan Reverse Rec]  
[Character Rec]  
[Reverse], [Normal]  
[Reverse], [Normal]  
[Reverse], [Normal]  
[Both], [Magnify], [Peaking], [Off]  
[Both], [Vertical], [Horizontal], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
Ü
[Reset Hour Meter]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
7
[Wi-Fi Remote]  
[Set Up New]  
[Select]  
For details refer to “WFT-E6 Wireless File  
Transmitter - Guide for Can Camcorders”  
(PDF file).  
[Edit]  
[Camera Settings]  
[CF A]  
[Initialize Media]  
[Firmware]  
[Cancel], [
Ü
Ü
[CF B]  
[SD Card]  
[Qui
Ü
Ü
Ü
1
2
3
Not available in the [Photos] index screen.  
The default value depends on the country/regior puhase.  
Setting options for [Assign Button]: [(NONE)], [Peaking], [Zebra], [WFM (LCD)], [Edge Monitor], [Magnification], [Color Bars],  
[Markers], [LCD Setup], [VF Setup], [LCD/VF B&W], [Onscreen Display], [Add Shot Mark 1], [Add Shot Mark 2], [Add $ Mark],  
[Add % Mark], [Time Code], [Time Code Hold], [Headphone +], [Headphone -], [Audio Output CH], [Audio Level], [Photo],  
[FUNC.], [FUNC. Shutter], [FUNC. ISO/Gain], [FUNC. WB], [My Menu], [Initialize Media], [User Setting (NONE)].  
The default settings are as follows. [1]: [Magnification], [2]: [Peaking], [3]: [Zebra], [4]: [WFM (LCD)], [5]: [Headphone +], [6]:  
[Headphone -], [7]: [Magnification], [8]: [WFM (LCD)], [9]: [Edge Monitor], [10] to [15]: [(NONE)].  
Available in the clip index screen only.  
Available in the clip index screen and [$ Mark] index screen only.  
Available in the [Photos] index screen only.  
Only appears when the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter is attached to the camcorder.  
4
5
6
7
[Reset]: Reset various camcorder settings.  
[All Settings]: Resets all the camcorders settings to default settings, except for the hour meter.  
[Camera Settings]: Resets the white balance, iris (# only), ISO speed, gain, shutter speed, [~ Camera  
Setup] settings and custom picture settings to default settings.  
[Assignable Buttons]: Resets the assignable buttons to default settings.  
[Tally Lamp]: Allows you to set whether the tally lamp illuminates while the camcorder is recording.  
[Media Access LED]: Allows you to set whether the CF card access indicators or the SD card access indicator  
illuminates while the camcorder is accessing a CF card or SD card.  
[Genlock Adjust.]: The phase difference between the external Genlock signal and the camcorder is initially set to  
0. This function allows you to adjust it within the range of approx. 0.4 H (-1023 to 1023). When setting to 1000  
or more or -1000 or less, set the first field to 10 or -10, respectively.  
[Clips] settings  
[Title Prefix]: Determines the first 2 characters of the clip name. Combined with the [Number Setting] setting,  
this constitutes the 6-character clip name.  
 
Menu Options  
[Number Setting]: Determines the last 4 digits of the clip name. Combined with the [Title Prefix] setting, this  
constitutes the 6-character clip name. Select [Set] to assign a desired number to the first clip you record or  
select [Reset] to reset the number to [0001].  
The numerals increase every time a clip is recorded.  
155  
[Delete Last Clip]: Deletes the last clip you recorded. This setting option will not appear if you turned the  
camcorder off since recording the last clip.  
[Country Code]: This identifier is the country code defined by ISO-3166-1 and is to be entered starting from the  
left.  
[Organization]: This identifier represents the organization that owns or operates the camcorder and can be  
obtained by registering with the SMPTE Registration Authority. If the organization is not registered, enter [0000].  
[User Code]: This identifier designates the user. Leave this blank if [Organization] is set to [0000].  
[SDI Rec Command]: When you connect the camcorder to another device using the HD/SD SDI terminal, if you  
start or stop recording with the camcorder, the other device will also start or stop recording.  
[Reset Hour Meter]: The camcorder has two “hour meters” – the first keeps track of total operation time and the  
second keeps track of operation time since the last time the second hour meter was reset with this function.  
[Firmware]: You can verify the current version of the camcorders firmware. This menu option is usually  
unavailable.  
[
My Menu] (  
mode only)  
Menu item  
Submenu  
Setting options  
A
[Edit]  
[Register]  
[Move]  
OK]  
[Ca, [OK]  
Canc], [OK]  
ancel], [OK]  
[Delete]  
[Reset All]  
           
Displaying the Status Screens  
Displaying the Status Screens  
You can use the status screens to check the camcorders various recording- and playback-related settings. You  
can also output the status screens on an external monitor.  
156  
Operating modes:  
1 Press the STATUS button.  
• The status screen most recently displayed will appear unless you  
turned off the camcorder or changed the operating mode. In such  
case, the [Camera] status screen appears in  
[Assign Button 1/2] status screen appears in  
mode and the  
mode.  
2 Push the joystick up/down or use the SELECT dial to scroll  
through the status screens.  
3 When you are finished, press the STATUS button again to exit  
the status screens.  
• Alternatively, you can press the MENU or CUSTOM PICTURE  
button. Doing so will exit the status screen and open the respective menu.  
,
Status screen  
Description  
A
1
[Camera]  
Displays settings related to recording, sISO spegain, iris  
1
and shutter speed increments, peripheation cortion and  
Ü
Ü
1
attached lens model informa
[Assign Button 1/2],  
[Assign Button 2/2]  
2
Allows you to verify the cuof eh assignable button.  
Ü
[Audio]  
[Media]  
[Video]  
Displays settis related to au
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Displays informion abouhe recording media.  
Displays the settinghe video terminals and which special  
recording mode is in effect.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
[Metadata 1/2], [Metadata 2/2]  
[Battery/Hour Meter]  
Displays the user memo and other metadata that will be recorded  
with clips.  
Allows you to check the remaining battery time, battery life and how  
long the camcorder has been in operation.  
Ü
[/ Data 1/3], [/ Data 2/3],  
[/ Data 3/3]  
Displays the settings for the custom picture file that will be  
embedded into clips.  
3
[Wi-Fi Remote 1/4] to  
[Wi-Fi Remote 4/4]  
Displays settings related to the configuration of the optional WFT-E6  
Wireless File Transmitter and the Wi-Fi network setup. For more  
details, download the “WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter - Guide for  
Canon Camcorders” (PDF file) from your local Web site and follow the  
instructions to complete the necessary setup.  
4
Ü
1
# only.  
2
3
4
Does not appear in the [Photos] index screen.  
These screens appear only after a custom picture file has been selected.  
These screens appear only when the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter is attached to the camcorder and an active  
access point has been activated with the [w Other Functions] > [Wi-Fi Remote] setting.  
   
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Camera] Status Screen (  
mode only)  
157  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
ISO speed/Gain increment (A 61)  
# Iris increment (A 64)  
Shutter speed increment (A 59)  
4
5
# Correction for peripheral illumination  
(A 33)  
# Lens model name info (A 32)  
[Assign Button 1/2], [Assign Button 2/2] Status Screen  
1
1
1
Assignable buttons 1 to 15* (A 99)  
* Assignable buttons 10 to 15 do not appear in  
mode.  
     
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Audio] Status Screen  
In  
mode  
158  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
In  
mode  
7
1
XLR terminal recording channel (A 81)  
Microphone sensitivity (XLR terminal) (A 82)  
Audio peak limiter (A 82, 83)  
Microphone mode (MIC terminal) (A 83)  
Microphone recording level (MIC terminal) (A 83)  
6
7
8
9
Microphone attenuator (MIC terminal) (A 84)  
Headphone volume (A 117)  
Linking rcording levels of XLR terminals (A 82)  
2
3
4
5
Micphe attenuator (XLR terminal) (A 83)  
10 udio rence signal (A 87)  
[Media] Status Screen  
4
5
6
7
1
2
8
9
3
10  
11  
1
2
3
4
5
6
CF card A  
CF card B  
SD card  
Total space on CF card A  
Used space on CF card A  
Available recording time on CF card A  
7
8
9
Approximate used space on CF card A  
Total space on SD card  
Used space on SD card  
10 Available number of shots on SD card  
11 Approximate used space on SD card  
NOTES  
• Depending on the recording media, the total space displayed on the screen may differ from the nominal  
capacity listed on the CF card or SD card.  
     
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Video] Status Screen  
159  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
HDMI OUT terminal status  
6
Superimposing onscreen displays to SD output  
Special recording mode (A 93)  
Number of frames for interval recording mode  
(A 93) or frame recording mode (A 94)  
Interval length for interval recording mode (A 93)  
HD/SD SDI terminal output setting (A 129)  
Superimposing onscreen displays to HD output  
(A 130)  
SD output setting (A 130)  
SYNC OUT terminal output status (A 129)  
7
8
4
5
9
[Metadata 1/2] Status Screen (  
mode onl
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
User memo file name (A 85)  
Clip title  
Camera operator  
4
5
Filming location  
Clip description  
[Metadata 2/2] Status Screen (  
mode only)  
1
2
3
1
2
Country code (A 155)  
Organization code  
3
User code  
   
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Battery/Hour Meter] Status Screen  
160  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
Remaining recording time  
Remaining recording time indicator  
Battery life indicator  
4
5
Total operation time (A 155)  
Operation time since using [Reset Hour Meter]  
[/ Data 1/3] Status Screen (  
mode only)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Custom picture file name (A 101)  
Gamma (A 104)  
Master pedestal (A 105)  
Master black RGB levels (A 105)  
Black gamma settings (level, range and point)  
(A 105)  
7
8
9
Skin detail settings (hue, chroma, area and Y  
level) (A 107)  
Selective NR settings (hue, chroma, area and Y  
level) (A 107)  
Low key saturation (A 105)  
6
Knee settings (slope, point and saturation)  
(A 106)  
     
Displaying the Status Screens  
[/ Data 2/3] Status Screen (  
mode only)  
1
2
3
4
5
161  
6
7
1
Sharpness settings (level, horizontal detail  
frequency, horizontal/vertical detail balance, and  
limit) (A 106)  
Sharpness settings (select, knee aperture gain  
and slope) (A 106)  
4
Coring settings (level, offset, curve and depth)  
Noise reduction (A 107)  
Color matrix settings (select, gain and phase)  
5
6
2
3
Level depend settings (level, slope and offset)  
(A 107)  
7
Color matrix settings (A 107)  
[/ Data 3/3] Status Screen (  
mode onl
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
White balance RGB gain (A 108)  
Color correction (A 108)  
Area A settings (phase, chroma, area and Y level)  
(A 108)  
5
6
Area B settings (phase, chroma, area and Y level)  
Area B revision settings (level and phase)  
4
Area A revision settings (level and phase)  
(A 108)  
7
8
Setup level and press (A 109)  
Clip at 100% (A 109)  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
If you have a problem with your camcorder, refer to this section. Consult your dealer or a Canon Service Center  
if the problem persists.  
162  
Power source  
The camcorder will not turn on or it turns off by itself.  
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.  
- Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly.  
Shortly after turning it on, the camcorder turns off on its own.  
- You are using a DC coupler or a battery pack that is not compatible for use with this camcorder. Use a recommended  
battery pack (A 173).  
Cannot charge the battery pack.  
- The temperature of the battery pack is outside the charging range. If the battery pack’s temperature is below 0 °C  
(32 °F), warm it before charging it; if it is above 40 °C (104 °F), let the battery pack cool down before charging it.  
- Charge the battery pack in temperatures between 0 °C and 40 °C (32 °F and 104 °F).  
- The battery pack is faulty. Replace the battery pack.  
The battery pack is exhausted extremely quickly even at normal temperatures.  
- Check the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 160) to see whether thbattery pack is at the end of its service life.  
If so, buy a new battery pack.  
Recording  
The camcorder’s controls are not responsive/disab
- The grip unit’s plug may not be correctconnecteamcorder. When attaching the grip unit to the camcorder,  
make sure the grip unit’s plug is firmly serted all thnto the connection terminal on the camcorder (A 38). If  
you changed the angle of the grip unit, ake suryou did not partially disconnect the plug by mistake.  
Pressing the START/STOP button will not stt reording.  
- The CF card is full or it already contains the maximum number of clips (999 clips). Delete some clips (A 122) or save  
your clips (A 132) and initialize the CF card (A 43) to free some space. Alternatively, replace the CF card.  
The point where the START/STOP button was pressed does not match the beginning/end of the recording.  
- There is a slight interval between pressing the START/STOP button and the actual start/end of recording. This is not a  
malfunction.  
The camcorder will not focus.  
- The viewfinder is not adjusted. Use the dioptric adjustment dial to make the proper adjustment (A 36).  
- The lens is dirty. Clean the lens with a soft lens-cleaning cloth.  
When a subject flits across in front of the lens, the image appears slightly bent.  
- This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors. When a subject crosses very quickly in front of the camcorder,  
the image may seem slightly warped. This is not a malfunction.  
Bright red, green or blue dots appear on the screen.  
- The camcorder’s CMOS sensor is a delicate piece of precision engineering. Direct exposure of the sensor to ion rays or other  
types of cosmic radiation may affect it and this may rarely appear as bright colored dots on the screen. This is the nature of  
CMOS image sensors and does not represent a malfunction. Adjusting the black balance (A 46) may help solve the problem.  
- The effects of the damage may be more noticeable when the camcorder is used in places subject to high  
temperatures, when a high ISO speed or gain level is used and when slow shutter speeds are used.  
Changing between recording (ÜREC) and record pause (STBY) takes longer than usual.  
- When the CF card contains a large number of clips, some operations may take longer than usual. Save your clips  
(A 132) and initialize the CF card (A 43). Alternatively, replace the CF card.  
The camcorder cannot record to a CF card properly.  
- This may occur as recordings are made and deleted over time. Save your clips (A 132) and initialize the CF card (A 43).  
After using the camcorder for a long time, it becomes hot.  
- The camcorder may become hot after using it continuously for long periods of time; this is not a malfunction. If the  
camcorder becomes unusually hot or it becomes hot after using it only for a short while, it may indicate a problem with  
the camcorder. Consult a Canon Service Center.  
   
Troubleshooting  
The built-in ND filter is stuck and does not change.  
- The electronic motor that drives the ND filter may not be working correctly. As an emergency measure, you can  
operate the ND filter manually (A 172). Eventually, consult a Canon Service Center.  
163  
Playback  
Cannot delete a clip.  
- You cannot delete clips with an $ mark. Remove the $ mark (A 120) to delete the clip.  
Deleting clips takes longer than usual.  
- When the CF card contains a large number of clips, some operations may take longer than usual. Save your clips  
(A 132) and initialize the CF card (A 43).  
Cannot delete a photo.  
- The photo is protected. Remove the protection (A 143).  
- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.  
Cannot copy clips.  
- There is not enough available space on the CF card being copied to or the CF card already contains the maximum  
number of clips (999 clips). Delete some clips (A 122) to free some space or replace the CF card.  
Indicators and Onscreen Displays  
ì lights up in red.  
- Battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pac.  
í appears on the screen.  
- The camcorder cannot communicate with the battey pack ed so the remaining battery time cannot be  
displayed.  
The tally lamp does not illuminate.  
- Set [Other Functions] > [Tally Lamp] [On].  
The tally lamp flashes quickly.  
(4 flashes per second)  
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replacr chae the battery pack.  
- There is not enough available space on thcard. Delete some clips (A 122) to free some space or replace the CF  
card.  
- A system error has occurred. Turn off the camcorder and back on again. If this does not solve the problem, consult a  
Canon Service Center.  
The tally lamp flashes slowly.  
(1 flash per second)  
- The combined available space on both CF cards is low. Replace the CF card that is not being recorded onto.  
* appears in red on the screen.  
- An SD card error occurred. Turn off the camcorder. Remove and reinsert the SD card. Initialize the SD card if the  
display does not change back to normal.  
- The SD card is full. Replace the SD card or delete some photos (A 142) to free some space on the SD card.  
Even after stopping recording, the CF2/CF3 access indicator stays illuminated in red.  
- The clip is being recorded. This is not a malfunction.  
Picture and Sound  
Screen displays turn on and off repeatedly.  
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.  
- Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly.  
Abnormal characters appear on the screen and the camcorder does not operate properly.  
- Disconnect the power source and reconnect it after a short time. If the problem still persists, perform one of the  
following actions.  
• Disconnect the power source and press the RESET button. This resets all the camcorder’s settings to default values  
except for custom picture settings and the hour meter.  
• Use the [Other Functions] > [Reset] > [All Settings] function. This resets all the camcorder’s settings to default  
values except for the hour meter.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Video noise appears on screen.  
- Keep a distance between the camcorder and devices that emit strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful  
magnets and motors, MRI machines or high-voltage power lines.  
Horizontal bands appear on the screen.  
- This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors when recording under some types of fluorescent, mercury or  
sodium lamps. To reduce the symptoms, set the shutter speed to 1/100 (A 58). This is not a malfunction.  
164  
Audio cannot be recorded.  
- An external microphone connected to the XLR terminal requires phantom power. Set the XLR terminal switch to  
MIC+48V (A 81).  
- The camcorder’s MIC terminal is given priority over the XLR terminals. To record audio from the XLR terminals, be sure  
not to connect any microphones to the MIC terminal.  
Audio is recorded at an extremely low level.  
- When using the XLR terminals: The AUDIO LEVEL switch is set to M, and the recording level is set too low. When using  
the MIC terminal: [Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [MIC Mode] is set to [Manual] and the [MIC Level] setting is too  
low. Check the audio level meter on the screen or rear panel and adjust the audio level correctly (A 82, 83).  
- The microphone attenuator is on. Turn off the microphone attenuator (A 83, 84).  
Sound is distorted or is recorded at lower levels.  
- When recording near loud sounds (such as fireworks, shows or concerts), sound may become distorted or it may not  
be recorded at the actual levels. Activate the microphone attenuator (A 83, 84), or adjust the audio recording level  
manually.  
Recording Media and Accessories  
Cannot insert the recording media.  
- The CF card or SD card you are trying to insert is not facing rect direion. Turn it over and insert it.  
Cannot record on the CF card.  
- A compatible CF card must be used (A 41).  
- Initialize the CF card (A 43) when you se with rder for the first time.  
- The CF card is full or it already containthe maximuer of clips (999 clips). Delete some clips (A 122) to free  
some space or replace the CF card.  
Cannot record on the SD card.  
- Initialize the SD card (A 43) when you use it with the camcorder for the first time.  
- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.  
- The SD card is full. Delete some photos (A 142) to free some space or replace the SD card.  
- The folder and file numbers have reached their maximum value. Set the [Other Functions] > [Photo Numbering]  
setting to [Reset] and insert a new SD card.  
Recording to and playing back from a CF card is slow.  
- This may occur as video is recorded/deleted over time. Save your clips (A 132) and initialize the CF card (A 43).  
Recording to and playing back from an SD card is slow.  
- This may occur as photos are recorded/deleted over time. Save your photos and initialize the SD card (A 43).  
Connections with External Devices  
Video noise appears on a nearby TV screen.  
- When using the camcorder in a room where a TV is located, keep a distance between the compact power adapter and  
the power or antenna cables of the TV.  
Playback looks fine on the camcorder but there is no image on the external monitor.  
- The camcorder is not connected correctly to the external monitor. Make sure you are using the correct connection  
(A 128).  
- The video input on the external monitor is not set to the video terminal to which you connected the camcorder. Select  
the correct video input.  
The camcorder is connected using a commercially available HDMI cable, but there is no picture or sound from the  
external monitor.  
- Disconnect the HDMI cable and then restore the connection or turn the camcorder off and then on again.  
Troubleshooting  
List of Messages  
Refer to this section if a message appears on the screen. The messages in this section appear in alphabetical  
order. For error messages related to the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter refer to the Troubleshooting  
section of the ‘WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter - Guide for Canon Camcorders’ (A 34).  
165  
Accessing CF A/CF B Do not remove  
- You opened the CF card slot cover while the camcorder was accessing the CF card. Close the CF card slot cover.  
Cannot acquire battery information  
- Battery information can be displayed only for batteries bearing the Intelligent System mark.  
Cannot communicate with the battery pack. Continue using this battery pack?  
- You attached a battery pack that does not bear the Intelligent System mark.  
- If you are using a battery pack that bears the Intelligent System mark, there may be a problem with the camcorder or  
battery pack. Consult a Canon Service Center.  
Cannot play back  
- The file control information is corrupted or there was a decoder error. Turn off the camcorder and back on again. If this  
does not solve the problem, consult a Canon Service Center.  
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. CF cards or clips with corrupt file control information cannot  
be read by the supplied Canon XF Utility or plugins.  
Cannot record  
- The file control information is corrupted or there was an encoder error. Turn off the camcorder and back on again.  
Then, remove the CF card being used and reinsert it. Alternatively, replace the CF card. If this does not solve the  
problem, consult a Canon Service Center.  
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. CF cardr cs with corrupt file control information cannot  
be read by the supplied Canon XF Utility or plugins.  
Cannot switch CF card slots  
- The SLOT SELECT button was pressed while the cordeording. Wait until recording is finished to change the  
selected CF card slot.  
CF A/CF B Buffer overflow. Recording was topp
- The data transfer rate was too high fothe CF carnd the recording was stopped. Use a recommended card  
(A 41).  
CF A/CF B Cannot restore  
- Could not recover data on the CF card. Saour clips (A 132) and initialize the CF card (A 43).  
CF A/CF B error  
- The CF card cannot be recognized or cannot be accessed. Check that the CF card is inserted correctly and not  
malfunctioning.  
CF A/CF B Management data is not supported and will be deleted  
- This message may appear if you insert into the camcorder a CF card that was initialized by another Canon  
professional camcorder. Check the contents of the CF card.  
CF A/CF B Management file error Cannot record  
- Cannot record because the camcorder cannot write to the file control information. This may occur if the files on the CF  
card were accessed using another device. Save your clips (A 132) and initialize the CF card (A 43).  
• During double slot recording, both “CF A” and “CF B” will appear in the message.  
CF A/CF B Media full  
- CF card A or CF card B is full so recording will not start. Switch to the CF card in the other CF card slot to record.  
CF A/CF B Media is not supported  
- CF cards that are less than 512 MB or not UDMA-compatible cannot be used with the camcorder. Use a  
recommended CF card (A 41).  
CF A/CF B Number of clips already at maximum  
- The CF card selected for recording already contains the maximum number of clips (999 clips). Replace the CF card or  
use the CF card in the other CF card slot.  
- Because both CF cards reached the maximum number of clips, double slot recording is not available.  
• During double slot recording, both “CF A” and “CF B” will appear in the message.  
CF A/CF B Reached the recording limit for one clip. Recording was stopped.  
- When recording a single clip for an extended period of time, the clip will be split into smaller video files every 2 GB (or  
1 GB when recording in slow motion). This message will appear when the number of smaller video files reaches 99.  
   
Troubleshooting  
CF A/CF B Recording was stopped.  
- The file control information is corrupted or there was an encoder error. Turn off the camcorder and back on again.  
Then, remove the CF card being used and reinsert it. Alternatively, replace the CF card. If this does not solve the  
problem, consult a Canon Service Center.  
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. CF cards or clips with corrupt file control information cannot  
be read by the supplied Canon XF Utility or plugins.  
166  
CF A/CF B Using a card that supports UDMA mode 4 or higher is recommended  
- The CF card’s UDMA mode is lower than UDMA4. We recommend using a CF card that with a UDMA mode of at least  
UDMA4.  
CF AJCF B / CF BJCF A Switched  
- This message appears when you use the SLOT SELECT button to switch the CF card slot in use or recording  
continued from one CF card to the other.  
CF AJCF B / CF BJCF A Will switch in a moment  
- The CF card is almost full so recording will continue on the other CF card in approximately 1 minute.  
Change the battery pack  
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.  
% / $ Mark Error  
- Could not add a % mark or $ mark. If the message appears in  
not work, add the mark in mode. If the message appears in  
mode, try adding the mark again. If that does  
mode, turn off the camcorder and then back  
on. Then, try to add the mark again.  
Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended  
- The CF card cannot be used for any of the following reasons.  
• A problem has occurred with the CF card.  
• The camcorder cannot read the CF card’s data.  
• The CF card was initialized using a computer.  
• The CF card has been partitioned.  
- Save your clips (A 132) and initialize the CF car
Check the SD card  
- The SD card cannot be accessed. Chek that the Sinserted correctly and not malfunctioning.  
- Due to an SD card error, photos cannoe taken or viewed. Remove and then reinsert the SD card or use a different  
SD card.  
Cover is open  
- The CF card slot cover was open when the camcorder was switched to or turned on in  
mode. Close the cover.  
Data on CF A/CF B needs recovering Attempt to recover?  
- If data on the CF card is corrupted, such as when the power suddenly turned off while recording, the data must be  
recovered. When this message appears, select [Yes] and press SET.  
Fan error  
- The cooling fan may not be working properly. Consult a Canon Service Center.  
File name error  
- The folder and file numbers have reached their maximum value. Set [Other Functions] > [Photo Numbering] to  
[Reset] and delete all the photos on the SD card (A 142) or initialize it (A 43).  
Invalid operation  
- The following operations cannot be performed.  
• Adding a shot mark to a clip that already has a shot mark or to a clip in frame recording mode or interval recording  
mode.  
• Adding an $ mark to clip that already has an $ mark or adding a % mark to a clip that already has a % mark.  
• In  
• Pressing the START/STOP button when there is no CF card in the camcorder.  
Media full  
mode, immediately reviewing a recording made in a special recording mode.  
- CF card A and CF card B are full. Delete some clips (A 122) to free some space or replace a CF card.  
Media is almost full  
- The amount of available space on CF card A and CF card B combined is low. Replace the CF card that is not selected.  
No clips  
- There are no clips on the CF card to play back. Clips must be recorded (A 49) in order to play them back.  
Troubleshooting  
No photos  
- There are no photos on the SD card to play back. Photos must be taken (A 139) in order to view them.  
No Shot Marks  
- This message appears if shot marks in a clip were deleted from the [Shot Mark] index screen. Press the INDEX button  
to return to the clip index screen.  
167  
Number of Shot Marks at maximum  
- The shot mark could not be added because the clip already contains 100 shot marks (" and # marks combined). You  
must delete shot marks (A 125) before adding any more.  
Recorded in 24.00P standard Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended.  
- The CF card contains 24.00P recordings. To record on this CF card, save your clips (A 132) and initialize the CF card  
(A 43). To play back the recordings on the CF card, set [w Other Functions] > [24.00P] to [On].  
Recorded in NTSC/PAL standard Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended  
- The CF card contains clips that were recorded using a recording type other than the one currently used by the  
camcorder. To record on this CF card, save your clips (A 132) and initialize the CF card (A 43). To play back the  
recordings on the CF card, set [w Other Functions] > [NTSC/PAL] to [NTSC] or [PAL] as necessary, so the camcorder  
matches the CF card.  
SD card error  
- You inserted a MultiMedia Card (MMC) into the camcorder. Use a recommended SD card (A 41).  
Shot Mark Error  
- Could not add a shot mark. If the message appears in  
mode, try adding the mark again. If that does not work,  
add the mark in  
mode after you finish recording. If the message appears in mode, turn off the  
camcorder and then back on. Then, try to add the mark again.  
System error  
- Turn off the camcorder and back on again. If this does not the proem, there may be a malfunction with the  
camcorder. Consult a Canon Service Center.  
This photo cannot be displayed  
- You may not be able to display photos taken wivicor image files created or edited on a computer.  
Handling Precautions  
Handling Precautions  
Camcorder  
Be sure to observe the following precautions to ensure maximum performance.  
168  
• Do not carry the camcorder by the LCD panel or monitor unit. Be careful when closing the LCD panel.  
• Do not leave the camcorder in places subject to high temperatures (like the inside of a car parked under direct  
sunlight), or high humidity.  
• Do not use the camcorder near strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful magnets and motors, MRI  
machines or high-voltage power lines. Using the camcorder in such places may cause anomalies in the video or  
audio or video noise to appear.  
• Do not use or store the camcorder in dusty or sandy places. The camcorder is not waterproof – avoid also  
water, mud or salt. If any of the above should get into the camcorder it may damage the camcorder and/or the  
lens. Consult a Canon Service Center as soon as possible.  
• Be careful to avoid dust and dirt particles accumulating on the lens or entering the camcorder. When you finish using  
the camcorder, make sure to attach the body cap to the lens mount and the lens cap and dust cap to the lens.  
• Do not point the lens or viewfinder lens at the sun or other strong light sources. Do not leave the camcorder  
pointed at a bright subject. Internal components may become damaged due to concentration of the light by  
the lens. Be careful especially when using a tripod or shoulder strap. When you are not using the camcorder or  
viewfinder, make sure to attach the lens cap to the lens and the viewfinder cap to the viewfinder.  
• Be careful of heat generated by lighting equipment.  
• Do not disassemble the camcorder. If the camcorder does not funn properly, consult qualified service  
personnel.  
• Do not touch the lens contacts on the lens mounDirty cts may cause a poor  
contact between the camcorder and the lens n inorrect operation of the  
camcorder. After removing the lens, make surthe ody cap to the lens  
mount and the lens cap and dust cato the len
• Handle the camcorder with care. Do ot subject the camcorder to shocks or vibration  
as this may cause damage. When usinthe soulder strap, do not allow the  
camcorder to swing and hit an object.  
Long-term storage  
If you do not intend to use the camcorder for a long time, store it in a place free of dust, in low humidity, and at  
temperatures not higher than 30 °C (86 °F).  
Battery Pack  
DANGER!  
Treat the battery pack with care.  
• Keep it away from fire (or it might explode).  
• Do not expose the battery pack to temperature higher than 60 °C (140 °F). Do not leave it near a heater or  
inside a car in hot weather.  
• Do not try to disassemble or modify it.  
• Do not drop it or subject it to shocks.  
• Do not get it wet.  
• Dirty terminals may cause a poor contact between the battery pack and the camcorder. Wipe the terminals  
with a soft cloth.  
   
Handling Precautions  
Long-term storage  
• Store battery packs in a dry place at temperatures no higher than 30 °C (86 °F).  
To extend the battery life of the battery pack, discharge it completely before storing it.  
• Charge and discharge all your battery packs fully at least once a year.  
169  
Always attach the battery terminal cover.  
Do not allow any metal objects to touch the terminals (figure 1), as this can  
cause a short circuit and damage the battery pack. Attach the terminal cover  
whenever the battery pack is not being used (figure 2).  
The battery terminal cover has a [ð]-shaped hole. This is useful when you  
wish to differentiate between charged and uncharged battery packs. For  
example, with charged battery packs, attach the terminal cover so that the  
[ð]-shaped hole shows the colored label.  
Figure 1  
Figure 2  
Terminal cover attached  
Charged  
Back side of the  
battery pack  
Uncharged  
Remaining battery time  
If the remaining battery time displayed is not corge he battery pack fully. Still, the correct time may not  
be displayed if a fully charged battery pack is uuouy in high temperatures or it is left unused for long  
periods of time. Also, the correct remning time be displayed, depending on the battery life. Use the  
time shown on the screen as an apprimation.  
Using higher capacity batteries  
You can use the optional BP-970G / BP-975 battery packs with this  
camcorder. However, as the battery compartment cover cannot be  
closed when using these higher capacity battery packs, you will need to  
remove it beforehand. Note that removing the battery compartment  
cover will render the camcorder more exposed to moisture, dust and  
foreign objects.  
1 Slide down the BATT.OPEN switch and open the battery  
compartment cover.  
2 Push the latch at the bottom of battery compartment.  
3 Gently pull out the battery compartment cover.  
Regarding the use of non-Canon battery packs  
• We recommend using genuine Canon battery packs bearing the Intelligent System  
mark.  
• If you attach to the camcorder battery packs that are not genuine Canon battery packs, the remaining battery  
time will not be displayed.  
   
Handling Precautions  
Recording Media  
• We recommend backing up the recordings on the recording media onto your computer. Data may be  
corrupted or lost due to defects or exposure to static electricity. Canon shall not be liable for lost or corrupted  
data.  
170  
• Do not touch or expose the terminals to dust or dirt.  
• Do not use recording media in places subject to strong magnetic fields.  
• Do not leave recording media in places subject to high humidity and high temperature.  
• Do not disassemble, bend, drop, or subject recording media to shocks and do not expose them to water.  
• Check the direction before inserting the recording media. Forcing recording media into the slot if it is not  
correctly oriented may damage the recording media or the camcorder.  
• Do not attach any labels or stickers on the recording media.  
SD cards: SD cards have a physical switch to prevent writing on the card so as to  
avoid the accidental erasure of the cards content. To write-protect the SD card,  
set the switch to the LOCK position.  
LOCK switch  
Built-in Rechargeable Lithium Battery  
The camcorder has a built-in rechargeable lithium battery to keep the ate/time and other settings. The built-in  
lithium battery is recharged while you use the camcorder; howeverdischarge completely if you do not use  
the camcorder for about 3 months.  
To recharge the built-in lithium battery: Connect the DC nd comact power adapter to the camcorder  
and use a household power outlet to power the der 24 hours while it is turned off.  
Disposal  
When you delete data on the recording media, only the file allocation table is altered and stored data is not  
physically erased. Take the necessary precautions when you dispose of the recording media, for example by  
physically damaging it to prevent the leakage of private data.  
If giving the recording media to another person, initialize it (using the [Complete] initialization option for SD cards,  
A 43). Fill it up with unimportant recordings, and then initialize it again. This makes recovering the original  
recordings very difficult.  
 
Maintenance/Others  
Maintenance/Others  
Cleaning  
Camcorder Body  
171  
• Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camcorder body. Never use chemically treated cloths or volatile solvents  
such as paint thinner.  
Lens  
• Remove any dust or dirt particles using a non-aerosol type blower brush.  
• Use a clean, soft lens-cleaning cloth to gently wipe the lens using commercially available cleaning fluid for  
eyeglasses. Never use tissue paper.  
LCD Screen  
• Clean the LCD screen using a clean, soft lens-cleaning cloth.  
• Condensation may form on the surface of the screen when the temperature changes suddenly. Wipe it with a  
soft dry cloth.  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
1 Slide the viewfinder unit’s LOCK/RELEASE screw to the RELEASE position and remove the  
viewfinder unit by sliding it up.  
2 Wipe away dirt with a cotton swab.  
3 Reattach the viewfinder unit by sliding it back onto the camcorder and turn back the LOCK/  
RELEASE screw to the LOCK position.  
IMPORTANT  
• Be careful not to scratch the glass and screen when cleaning them.  
Condensation  
Moving the camcorder rapidly between hot and cold temperatures may cause condensation (water droplets) to  
form on its internal surfaces. Stop using the camcorder if condensation is detected. Continued use may damage  
the camcorder.  
     
Maintenance/Others  
Condensation may form in the following cases:  
• When the camcorder is moved quickly from cold to warm places  
• When the camcorder is left in a humid room  
• When a cold room is heated rapidly  
172  
To avoid condensation  
• Do not expose the camcorder to sudden or extreme changes in temperature.  
• Remove the recording media and battery pack. Then, place the camcorder in an airtight plastic bag and let it  
adjust gradually to temperature changes before removing it from the bag.  
When condensation is detected  
The camcorder automatically shuts off.  
The precise time required for water droplets to evaporate will vary depending on the location and weather  
conditions. As a general rule, wait for 2 hours before resuming use of the camcorder.  
Operating the ND Filter Manually  
In the rare case that the internal electronic motor that drives the ND filter malfunctions, you can operate the ND  
filter manually as an emergency measure.  
1 Turn off the camcorder and remove the lens.  
2 Unscrew the screw in the illustration and remove t
cover.  
3 Pressing lightly, use a Phillips head screwtur
the ND filter as necessary.  
• You can check the position of the D filter throe  
lens mount.  
4 Return the cover and tighten the scre
Using the Camcorder Abroad  
Power Sources  
You can use the compact power adapter to operate the camcorder and to charge battery packs in any country  
with power supply between 100 and 240VAC, 50/60Hz. Consult a Canon Service Center for information on plug  
adapters for overseas use.  
 
Optional Accessories  
Optional Accessories  
The following optional accessories are compatible with this camcorder. The availability differs from area to area.  
173  
BP-950G, BP-955,  
BP-970G, BP-975  
Battery Pack  
CA-940 Compact  
Power Adapter  
CA-930 Compact  
Power Adapter*  
CB-920 Car Battery  
Adapter*  
WFT-E6 Wireless File  
Transmitter  
TA-100 Tripod Adapter  
SBRShooting  
Be  
TB-1 Tripod Adapter  
Base  
* This accessory cannot be used to power this ordcan only be used to charge the battery pack.  
For our customers in the USA: Call visit your local retailer/dealer for genuine Canon video accessories. You  
can also obtain genuine accessories for our Cnon camcorder by calling: 1-800-828-4040, Canon U.S.A.  
Information Center.  
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.  
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories.  
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the  
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please  
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon  
accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.  
Battery Packs  
When you need extra battery packs, select from the following: BP-950G,  
BP-955, BP-970G*, BP-975*  
When you use battery packs bearing the Intelligent System mark, the  
camcorder will communicate with the battery and display the remaining  
usage time (accurate to 1 minute). You can only use and charge these battery  
packs with camcorders and chargers compatible with Intelligent System.  
BP-955  
BP-975  
*The optional BP-970G / BP-975 Battery Pack were not originally designed for use  
with this camcorder. Because of its size, you will not be able to close the battery  
compartment cover when using one (A 169).  
       
Optional Accessories  
Charging Times  
Use the supplied CG-940 Battery Charger to charge battery packs. The charging times given in the following  
table are approximate and vary according to charging conditions and initial charge of the battery pack.  
BP-950G  
245 min.  
BP-955  
BP-970G  
350 min.  
BP-975  
174  
200 min.  
295 min.  
Recording and Playback Times  
Recording and playback times given in the following tables are approximate and vary according to recording  
mode and charging, recording or playback conditions. The effective usage time of the battery pack may  
decrease when recording in cold surroundings, when using the brighter screen settings, etc.  
# EF lenses draw power from the camcorder to operate some functions. Effective usage times may  
decrease depending on the lens used.  
# Approximate times with the monitor unit attached (LCD screen + viewfinder), SDI output on  
Type of recording  
NTSC / 24.00P  
Bit rate  
50 Mbps  
Usage time  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
BP-950G  
185 min.  
120 min.  
230 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
23.  
12n.  
35 m.  
90 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
190 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
190 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
BP-955  
180 min.  
115 min.  
230 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
230 min.  
5 min.  
120 min.  
230 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
235 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
190 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
BP-970G  
255 min.  
165 min.  
325 min.  
260 min.  
165 min.  
325 min.  
260 min.  
165 min.  
325 min.  
265 min.  
170 min.  
335 min.  
265 min.  
170 min.  
335 min.  
265 min.  
170 min.  
335 min.  
BP-975  
275 min.  
175 min.  
345 min.  
275 min.  
175 min.  
345 min.  
275 min.  
180 min.  
350 min.  
280 min.  
180 min.  
355 min.  
280 min.  
180 min.  
355 min.  
285 min.  
185 min.  
360 min.  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
50 Mbps  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
PAL  
Record(maximum
Recordi(typical*)  
Playback  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
# Approximate times using the viewfinder (monitor unit not attached)  
Type of recording  
NTSC / 24.00P  
Bit rate  
50 Mbps  
Usage time  
BP-950G  
200 min.  
130 min.  
200 min.  
130 min.  
205 min.  
130 min.  
205 min.  
135 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
BP-955  
200 min.  
130 min.  
200 min.  
130 min.  
200 min.  
130 min.  
205 min.  
130 min.  
205 min.  
135 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
BP-970G  
280 min.  
180 min.  
285 min.  
185 min.  
285 min.  
185 min.  
290 min.  
185 min.  
290 min.  
190 min.  
295 min.  
190 min.  
BP-975  
300 min.  
195 min.  
300 min.  
195 min.  
305 min.  
195 min.  
310 min.  
200 min.  
310 min.  
200 min.  
310 min.  
200 min.  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
50 Mbps  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
PAL  
   
Optional Accessories  
$ Approximate times with the monitor unit attached (LCD screen + viewfinder), SDI output on  
Type of recording  
NTSC / 24.00P  
Bit rate  
50 Mbps  
Usage time  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
BP-950G  
185 min.  
120 min.  
230 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
235 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
235 min.  
190 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
190 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
190 min.  
120 min.  
.  
BP-955  
185 min.  
120 min.  
230 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
230 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
230 min.  
185 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
190 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
190 min.  
120 min.  
240 min.  
BP-970G  
260 min.  
165 min.  
325 min.  
260 min.  
165 min.  
325 min.  
260 min.  
165 min.  
330 min.  
265 min.  
170 min.  
335 min.  
265 min.  
170 min.  
335 min.  
265 min.  
170 min.  
340 min.  
BP-975  
275 min.  
175 min.  
345 min.  
275 min.  
180 min.  
350 min.  
280 min.  
180 min.  
350 min.  
280 min.  
180 min.  
355 min.  
280 min.  
180 min.  
360 min.  
285 min.  
185 min.  
360 min.  
175  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
50 Mbps  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
PAL  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Playback  
$ Approximate times using the viewfindetor not attached)  
Type of recording  
NTSC / 24.00P  
Bit rate  
50 Mbps  
Usage time  
BP-9G  
205 min.  
130 min.  
205 min.  
130 min.  
205 min.  
130 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
BP-955  
200 min.  
130 min.  
205 min.  
130 min.  
205 min.  
130 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
210 min.  
135 min.  
BP-970G  
285 min.  
185 min.  
285 min.  
185 min.  
290 min.  
185 min.  
295 min.  
190 min.  
295 min.  
190 min.  
295 min.  
190 min.  
BP-975  
305 min.  
195 min.  
305 min.  
195 min.  
305 min.  
195 min.  
315 min.  
200 min.  
315 min.  
200 min.  
315 min.  
205 min.  
Recorng (maximum
Recordg (typical
Recording axium)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical*)  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
50 Mbps  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
PAL  
* Approximate times for recording with repeated operations such as start/stop, and power on/off.  
Optional Accessories  
CB-920 Car Battery Adapter  
Use the car battery adapter to charge battery packs on the go. The car  
battery adapter plugs into your cars cigarette lighter socket and runs off a  
12-24V DC negative ground battery.  
176  
TA-100 Tripod Adapter  
The TA-100 allows you to quickly mount/unmount the  
camcorder on/from a tripod.  
SBR-1000 Shooting Brace  
Using the SBR-1000 for additional support of the camcorder with the neck  
strap will significantly lighten the load of the camcoders weight while  
shooting.  
This mark identifies genuine Canon video acce. When ou use Canon video equipment, we  
recommend Canon-brand accessorieductbearing the same mark.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
C300 / C300 PL  
System  
177  
• Recording System  
Movies: Video compression: MPEG-2 Long GOP;  
Audio compression: Linear PCM, 16 bits, 48 kHz, 2 channels  
File type: MXF  
Photos: DCF (Design rule for Camera File system), compatible with Exif Ver. 2.3, JPEG compression  
• Video Configuration (recording/playback)  
50 Mbps (CBR, 4:2:2, 422P@HL)  
1920x1080: 59.94i, 50.00i, 29.97P, 25.00P, 24.00P, 23.98P  
1280x720: 59.94P, 50.00P, 29.97P, 25.00P, 24.00P, 23.98P  
35 Mbps (VBR, 4:2:0, MP@HL)  
1920x1080: 59.94i, 50.00i, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P  
1280x720: 59.94P, 50.00P, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P  
25 Mbps (CBR, 4:2:0, MP@H14)  
1440x1080: 59.94i, 50.00i, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P  
• Recording Media (not included)  
Movies: CompactFlash (CF) Card Type I (two slots)  
Photos: SD or SDHC (SD High Capacity) memory card*  
* Custom picture files, camera settings and user memo files can on and ead from the memory card as well.  
• Maximum Recording Time**  
16 GB CF Card  
50 Mbps: 40 min., 35 Mbps: 55 mins: 8min.  
64 GB CF Card  
50 Mbps: 160 min., 35 Mbs: 225 min., 25 Mbps: 310 min.  
**Approximate figures based on continuous cording
• Image Sensor: Super-35mm-equivalent CMOS sensor, approx. 8,290,000 pixels (3840x2160)  
• Viewfinder: 1.3 cm (0.52 in.), approx. 1,555,000 dots, 100% coverage  
• Lens Mount  
# Canon EF mount compatible with Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)  
$ PL Lens mount without data interface terminals  
Lens multiplication factor: approx. 1.53 (for 35mm equivalent focal length)  
• ND Filter: Built-in (Off, 2, 4 or 6 stops), motor operated  
• White Balance  
Custom white balance (two sets, A and B), color temperature setting (2,000K to 15,000K); two preset settings  
(daylight, 5,400 K and incandescent lamp, 3,200 K) that can be further fine-tuned  
# Iris: 1/2-stop increments, 1/3-stop increments, fine-tuning  
• ISO Speed  
1-stop increments: ISO 320, ISO 400 to ISO 12800, ISO 20000  
1/3-stop increments: ISO 320 to ISO 20000  
• Gain: -6 dB to 30 dB (3-dB increments), 0 dB to 24 dB (fine-tuning in 0.5-dB increments)  
• Shutter Speed  
Speed (1/3-stop increments, 1/4-stop increments), angle, clear scan, slow, off  
# Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction: Available for Canon EF lenses***  
***Some Canon EF lenses are not compatible with peripheral illumination correction.  
   
Specifications  
• Sensor Sensitivity (ISO 640 (0 dB), 2000 lux, 89.9% reflection)  
! F9 (1920x1080 at 59.94i) " F10 (1920x1080 at 50.00i)  
• S/N Ratio (ISO 850, using Canon Log gamma)  
54 dB (typical, 1920x1080, ! at 29.97P / " at 25.00P)  
178  
• Subject Illumination (24 dB, with a f/1.2 lens)  
! 0.30 lux (29.97P, shutter speed 1/30)  
" 0.25 lux (25.00P, shutter speed 1/25)  
• Size of Video Recordings  
50 Mbps, 35 Mbps: 1920x1080 pixels, 1280x720 pixels  
25 Mbps: 1440x1080 pixels  
• Size of Photos  
1920x1080 pixels, 1280x720 pixels (only when capturing a photo from a clip)  
Terminals  
• HD/SD SDI Terminal  
BNC jack, output only, 0.8 Vp-p / 75 Ω, unbalanced  
HD-SDI:  
SMPTE 292M  
Video (1080i or 720P), embedded audio, time code (VITC/LTC)  
SMPTE 259M  
SD-SDI:  
Video (480i or 576i), embedded audio, time code I/LTC)  
• HDMI OUT Terminal  
HDMI connector, output only  
• SYNC OUT Terminal  
BNC jack, output only, 1 Vp-p / 75 Ω  
Output signal: HD component video minance sD-Y), HD analog tri-level signal, Analog blackburst  
signal, SD composite video  
• MIC Terminal  
3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, -72 dBV (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 600 Ω  
Microphone attenuator: 20 dB  
× (Headphone) Terminal  
3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, -G to -12 dBV (16 Ω load, volume range Min to Max) / 50 Ω or less  
• GENLOCK Terminal  
BNC jack, input only: 1 Vp-p / 75 Ω  
• TIME CODE Terminal  
BNC jack, input/output  
Input: 0.5 Vp-p to 18 Vp-p / 10 kΩ  
Output: 1 Vp-p / 75 Ω  
• REMOTE Terminal  
2.5 mm stereo mini-jack  
• Grip Unit Connection Terminal  
Proprietary connector for the supplied Grip Unit connection plug  
• WFT Terminal  
Proprietary connector for the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter  
Specifications  
Power/Others  
• Power Supply (rated)  
7.4 V DC (battery pack), 8.4 V DC (DC IN)  
• Power Consumption (recording at 50 Mbps, viewfinder/LCD screen normal brightness, SDI output on)  
LCD screen and viewfinder: 11.7 W (NTSC, 24.00P recordings), 11.4 W (PAL recordings)  
Viewfinder only: 10.7 W (NTSC, 24.00P recordings), 10.4 W (PAL recordings)  
$ LCD screen and viewfinder: 11.7 W (NTSC, 24.00P recordings), 11.4 W (PAL recordings)  
Viewfinder only: 10.6 W (NTSC, 24.00P recordings), 10.2 W (PAL recordings)  
179  
#
Maximum rated power consumption: 20.9 W  
• Operating Temperature  
0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
• Dimensions (W x H x D)*  
Minimal configuration with thumb rest:  
# 133 x 179 x 171 mm (5.2 x 7.0 x 6.7 in.) $ 133 x 179 x 177 mm (5.2 x 7.0 x 7.0 in.)  
Configuration with grip unit and grip belt:  
# 174 x 179 x 171 mm (6.9 x 7.0 x 6.7 in.) $ 174 x 179 x 177 mm (6.9 x 7.0 x 7.0 in.)  
Configuration with monitor unit:  
185 x 249 x 187 mm (7.3 x 9.8 x 7.4 in.)  
Configuration with handle unit and monitor unit:  
185 x 284 x 301 mm (7.3 x 11.2 x 11.9 in.)  
* All dimensions are approximate.  
• Weight **  
Camcorder unit only:  
# 1430 g (3.2 lb.)  
Camcorder with grip unit and grip belt, monit-95battery pack and two CF cards:  
# 2520 g (5.6 lb.) $ 220 g (6.0
Camcorder with grip unit and grip bt, monitor unthandle unit, BP-955 battery pack and two CF cards:  
$ 1630 g (3.
# 2700 g (6.0 lb.)  
**All weights are approximate.  
$ 290 g (6lb.)  
Modular Units  
Monitor Unit  
Modular unit can be rotated 270º on its axis; includes the LCD panel, recording and playback controls, XLR  
terminals and related audio controls.  
• LCD Panel: Articulated panel, 270º vertical rotation, 180º lateral rotation  
• LCD Screen: 10.1 cm (4.0 in.), wide, color, approx. 1,230,000 dots, 100% coverage  
• CH1, CH2 Terminals  
XLR jack (pin1: shield, pin2: hot, pin3: cold), 2 sets  
Sensitivity  
MIC setting: -60 dBu (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 600 Ω  
LINE setting: 4 dBu (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 10 kΩ  
Microphone attenuator: 20 dB  
• Weight: Approx. 620 g (1.4 lb.)  
Grip Unit  
Modular unit can be attached at any of 24 positions (15º intervals); includes limited recording controls.  
• Weight: Approx. 230 g (8.1 oz.)  
Specifications  
Handle Unit  
Modular unit includes a cold accessory shoe and socket for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.) screws for other accessories.  
• Weight: Approx. 180 g (6.3 oz.)  
180  
CA-940 Compact Power Adapter  
• Power Supply: 100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
• Rated Output / Consumption  
8.4 V DC, 4.8 A / 83 VA (100 V) – 107 VA (240 V)  
• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
• Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 103 x 51 x 139 mm (4.1 x 2.0 x 5.5 in.)  
• Weight: 395 g (13.9 oz.)  
CG-940 Battery Charger  
• Power Supply: 100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
• Rated Output / Consumption  
8.4 V DC, 1.5/2.0 A / 40 VA (100 V) – 54 VA (240 V)  
• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104
• Dimensions (W x H x D): 85 x 51 x 110 mm (4.3 n.)  
• Weight: Approx. 240 g (8.5 oz.)  
BP-955 Battery Pack  
• Battery Type  
Rechargeable lithium ion battery, compatible with Intelligent System  
• Rated Voltage  
7.4 V DC  
• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
• Battery Capacity  
Typical: 5,200 mAh  
Minimum: 37 Wh / 4,900 mAh  
• Dimensions (W x H x D): 38.2 x 43.5 x 70.5 mm (1.5 x 1.7 x 2.8 in.)  
• Weight: 220 g (7.8 oz)  
Weight and dimensions are approximate. Errors and omissions excepted.  
The information in this manual is verified as of January 2012. Subject to change without notice.  
Index  
181  
D
A
E
B
C
G
CF card  
H
Clips  
I
Index screens  
*# only  
 
182  
Playback  
J
K
R
L
Recording  
M
S
N
O
T
P
Photos  
*# only **$ only  
USA  
& N  
Z
CANON PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL VIDEO EQUIPMENT LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS  
PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES  
The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U.S.A., Inc. ('Canon USA') with respect to Canon Professional Digital Video Equipment (the  
'Equipment') packaged with this limited warranty and purchased in the United States. This limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill  
of Sale or other proof of purchase. The Equipment is warranted to the original end-user purchaser, when delivered in new condition in its original  
container, under normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows:  
Parts: Defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase.  
Labor: For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase, labor will be provided free of charge by Canon USA's factory service centers or  
designated service facilities located in the United States.  
184  
When returning Equipment under this warranty, you must pre-pay the shipping charges, and you must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of  
purchase with a complete explanation of the problem. During the ONE-YEAR warranty period, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be return-  
shipped to you free of charge. For repairs after the warranty period is over, you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and an opportunity to  
approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred. If you approve, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be returned to you at your  
risk and expense. If you disapprove, we will return-ship the Equipment to you at no charge to you to an address within the United States.  
This limited warranty only applies if the Equipment is used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software, as  
to which items Canon USA will have no responsibility. Canon USA shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty for use of the  
Equipment in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and/or incompatible software. Non-Canon brand peripheral equipment and  
software which may be distributed with, or factory loaded on, the Equipment, are sold 'AS IS' without warranty of any kind by Canon USA,  
including any implied warranty regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The sole warranty with respect to such non-  
Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof. If the Equipment contains a hard disk drive, Canon USA recommends  
that data stored on that drive be duplicated or backed up to prevent its loss in the event of failure or other malfunction of such drive.  
In order to obtain warranty service, please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whoyou purchased the Equipment or contact the CANON  
INFORMATION CENTER AT 855-CINE-EOS (855-246-3367) or on the Internet at pro.usanocom/support. You will be directed to the nearest  
service facility for your Equipment.  
This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use oe Equipd does not apply in the following cases:  
A. Loss or damage to the Equipment due to abuse, mishandlinmpror maintenance, use of non-Canon accessories or failure to follow  
operating, maintenance or environmental instruons escrUSA's user's manual;  
B. If the Equipment is defective as a result of leakg batteries, sawater damage;  
C. If defects or damages are caused by the use of rts or suppies (other than those sold by Canon USA) that cause damage to the Equipment or that  
cause abnormally frequent service calls or service roblem
D. If defects or damages are caused by service other than Canon USA's factory service centers or authorized service facilities;  
E. Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware;  
F. Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Equipment;  
G. If the Equipment has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.  
This Limited Warranty does not apply to Equipment purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or  
consumables for the Equipment, which are sold "AS IS", without warranty of any kind by Canon USA. Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale  
as a permanent record of your purchase. This card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection, modification or product  
recall under applicable laws or regulations.  
NO IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THIS EQUIPMENT AFTER THE  
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY (EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE) GIVEN BY ANY PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION  
WITH RESPECT TO THIS EQUIPMENT SHALL BIND THE UNDERSIGNED (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED  
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU). CANON USA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF  
REVENUES OR PROFITS, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICE, STORAGE CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE EQUIPMENT'S HARD DRIVE, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL  
THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON USA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL  
RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON USA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE EQUIPMENT SOLD BY CANON USA AND  
CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ASSUME ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY  
TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT  
NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON USA (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU).THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER  
THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS EQUIPMENT OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.  
CANON U.S.A., INC.  
CANADA  
CANON PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL VIDEO EQUIPMENT LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS  
PURCHASED IN CANADA  
The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon Canada Inc. ('Canon Canada') with respect to Canon Professional Digital Video Equipment (the  
'Equipment') packaged with this limited warranty and purchased in Canada. This limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill of Sale or  
other proof of purchase. The Equipment is warranted to the original end-user purchaser, when delivered in new condition in its original container, under  
normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows:  
Parts: Defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase.  
Labor: For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase, labor will be provided free of charge by Canon Canada's factory service center or  
designated service facilities located in Canada.  
185  
When returning Equipment under this warranty, you must pre-pay the shipping charges, and you must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of  
purchase with a complete explanation of the problem. During the ONE-YEAR warranty period, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be return-  
shipped to you free of charge. For repairs after the warranty period is over, you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and an opportunity to  
approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred. If you approve, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be returned to you at your  
risk and expense. If you disapprove, we will return-ship the Equipment to you at no charge to you to an address within Canada.  
This limited warranty only applies if the Equipment is used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software, as to  
which items Canon Canada will have no responsibility. Canon Canada shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty for use of the  
Equipment in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and/or incompatible software. Non-Canon brand peripheral equipment and  
software which may be distributed with, or factory loaded on, the Equipment, are sold 'AS IS' without warranty of any kind by Canon Canada,  
including any implied warranty or condition regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The sole warranty with respect to such  
non-Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof. If the Equipment contains a hard disk drive, Canon Canada recommends  
that data stored on that drive be duplicated or backed up to prevent its loss in the event of failure or other malfunction of such drive.  
In order to obtain warranty service, please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whom you pchased the Equipment or contact the CANON PROFESSIONAL  
SERVICE CENTRE 1-800-667-2666 or on the Internet at www.canon.ca/pro. You will be direto e nearest service facility for your Equipment.  
This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the End does apply in the following cases:  
A. Loss or damage to the Equipment due to abuse, mishandlint, imper maintenance, use of non-Canon accessories or failure to follow  
operating, maintenance or environmental instructions preon Cada's user's manual;  
B. If the Equipment is defective as a result of leakg berieswater damage;  
C. If defects or damages are caused by the use parts or supplthan those sold by Canon Canada) that cause damage to the Equipment or  
that cause abnormally frequent service calls oervice prolems;  
D. If defects or damages are caused by service otthan non Canada's factory service centers or authorized service facilities;  
E. Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware;  
F. Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Equipment;  
G. If the Equipment has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.  
This Limited Warranty does not apply to Equipment purchased outside Canada. This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or consumables for  
the Equipment, which are sold "AS IS", without warranty of any kind by Canon Canada. Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale as a  
permanent record of your purchase. This card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection, modification or product recall  
under applicable laws or regulations.  
NO IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THIS  
EQUIPMENT AFTER THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY (EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE) GIVEN BY ANY PERSON,  
FIRM OR CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO THIS EQUIPMENT SHALL BIND THE UNDERSIGNED (SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS  
ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU). CANON  
CANADA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICE, STORAGE  
CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE EQUIPMENT'S  
HARD DRIVE, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
EQUIPMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON CANADA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON CANADA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF  
THE EQUIPMENT SOLD BY CANON CANADA AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ASSUME ALL RISK  
AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE,  
MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON CANADA (SOME PROVINCES DO NOT  
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU).  
THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS EQUIPMENT OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM  
IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from province to province.  
CANON CANADA INC.  
Canon Inc.  
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
ASIA and HONG KONG, S.A.R.  
NEW ZEALAND www.canon.co.nz  
Canon New Zealand Ltd  
0800-222-666 (within New Zealand only)  
(64) 09-489-0300  
Canon Hongkong Company Ltd  
19/F, The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive,  
Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
+852 3191 2333,  
+852 2428 3963  
SINGAPORE  
AUSTRALIA www.canon.com.au  
Canon Australia Pty Ltd  
13-13-83 (within Australia only)  
(61) 02-9805-2555  
Canon Singapore Pte. Ltd  
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower,  
Singapore 098632  
(65) 6799 8888,  
(65) 6799 8882  
CANADA  
UNITED KINGDOM  
CANON CANADA INC.  
http://www.canon.ca/pro  
Canon UK Ltd  
CCI Service Centre, Unit 130, Centennial Park,  
Borehamood, Hertfordshire, WD6 3SE  
084-9-0100  
Professional Product Support / Soutien des  
produits professionnels  
(800) 667-2666  
CENTRO Y SURAMÉRICA  
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.  
http://www.cla.canon.com  
ANON U.S.A., INC.  
hp://pro.usa.canon.com  
http://pro.usa.canon.com/support  
(855) CINE-EOS (855-246-3367)  
(USA only)  
EUROPE www.canon-europa.com  
Canon Europa N.V.  
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61,  
1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
MÉXICO  
CANON MEXICANA, S DE RL DE CV  
http://www.canon.com.mx  
52 (55) 5249-4905  
Visit your local Canon Web site to download the latest version of this Instruction Manual.  
0157W376  
© CANON INC. 2012  
PUB. DIE-0406-001  

Bushnell Medalist 20 1354 User Manual
Canon DC311 User Manual
Canon ZR600 User Manual
Casio FX 85GT PLUS User Manual
Citizen Systems Calculator SRP 145N User Manual
Clarion DXZ585USB User Manual
Directed Electronics 28861 User Manual
GE Monogram ZDWI240 User Manual
Jensen VM9224 User Manual
JVC GR X5AC User Manual